Sei sulla pagina 1di 450

GPS Pathfinder Office ®

User Guide
Volume 3

Connection Manager
Configuration Manager
Data Transfer Utility
Differential Correction
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities
Pathfndr.bk Page 2 Thursday, June 17, 1999 11:02 AM
GPS Pathfinder Office
User Guide
Volume 3

This volume contains manuals for the following software:

Connection Manager
Configuration Manager
Data Transfer Utility
Differential Correction Utility
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities

Version 2.80
Part Number 31312-28-ENG
Revision B
March 2001
Corporate Office Release Notice
Trimble Navigation Limited This is the March 2001 release (Revision B) of the
645 North Mary Avenue GPS Pathfinder Office Software User Guide, part
Post Office Box 3642 number 31312-28-ENG. It applies to version 2.80
Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642 of the GPS Pathfinder® Office software.
U.S.A.
Phone: +1-408-481-8940, 1-800-545-7762 The following limited warranties give you specific
Fax: +1-408-481-7744 legal rights. You may have others, which vary
www.trimble.com from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.

Copyright and Trademarks Software and Firmware License, Limited


Warranty
© 1999–2001, Trimble Navigation Limited. All
rights reserved. For STL support, the GPS This Trimble software and/or firmware product
Pathfinder Office software uses the Moscow (the “Software”) is licensed and not sold. Its use is
Center for SPARC Technology adaptation of the governed by the provisions of the applicable End
SGI Standard Template Library. Copyright © User License Agreement (“EULA”), if any,
1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Copyright © included with the Software. In the absence of a
1996, 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, separate EULA included with the Software
Inc., Copyright © 1997 Moscow Center for providing different limited warranty terms,
SPARC Technology. Portions of this computer exclusions, and limitations, the following terms
program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, and conditions shall apply. Trimble warrants that
Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID® is protected by this Trimble Software product will substantially
U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents conform to Trimble’s applicable published
Pending. specifications for the Software for a period of
ninety (90) days, starting from the date of
Printed in the United States of America. Printed delivery.
on recycled paper.
Warranty Remedies
The Sextant logo with Trimble, ASPEN, Asset
Surveyor, GeoExplorer, and GPS Pathfinder are Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy
trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited, under the warranties set forth above shall be, at
registered in the United States Patent and Trimble’s option, to repair or replace any Product
Trademark Office. or Software that fails to conform to such warranty
(“Nonconforming Product”), or refund the
The Globe & Triangle logo, Trimble, 4000SSE, purchase price paid by you for any such
4000SE, 4600LS, 7400MSi, Coordinate System Nonconforming Product, upon your return of any
Manager, Data Dictionary Editor, Geodetic Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance
Surveyor, Geodetic System Surveyor SSi, GIS with Trimble’s standard return material
Surveyor, GPSurvey, Land Surveyor II, Land authorization procedures.
Surveyor IID, Pathfinder Basic, Pathfinder
Professional, PFINDER, Phase Processor,
QuickPlan, TerraSync, TDC1, and TDC2, are
trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited.
MrSID® and LizardTech™ are trademarks of
LizardTech, Inc. and are used with permission.

All other trademarks are the property of their


respective owners.
Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED IS NOT
RESPONSIBLE FOR THE OPERATION OR
These warranties shall be applied only in the event FAILURE OF OPERATION OF GPS SATELLITES
and to the extent that: (i) the Products and OR THE AVAILABILITY OF GPS SATELLITE
Software are properly and correctly installed, SIGNALS.
configured, interfaced, maintained, stored, and
operated in accordance with Trimble’s relevant Limitation of Liability
operator's manual and specifications, and; (ii) the
Products and Software are not modified or TRIMBLE’S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY
misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE LIMITED TO
to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects THE GREATER OF THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU
or performance problems resulting from (i) the FOR THE PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE LICENSE OR
combination or utilization of the Product or U.S.$25.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
Software with products, information, data, PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO
systems or devices not made, supplied or specified EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
Software under any specification other than, or in INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
addition to, Trimble's standard specifications for WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE
its products; (iii) the unauthorized modification or OR LEGAL THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO
use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, AND
caused by accident, lightning or other electrical ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND
discharge, fresh or salt water immersion or spray; MATERIALS, (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
or (v) normal wear and tear on consumable parts LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF
(e.g., batteries). BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY
THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS), REGARDLESS OF
ENTIRE LIABILITY, AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
REMEDIES, RELATING TO PERFORMANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND
THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING
OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED
THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, AND BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME
ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
NAVIGATION LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS APPLY TO YOU.
BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION,
PRODUCTION, INSTALLATION, OR
DISTRIBUTION, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. THE STATED EXPRESS
WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL
OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART
OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF, OR IN
CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR
SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS
ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN
IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Contents
About This Manual
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

13 The Connection Manager Utility


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Using the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
The Batch Processor Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Configuring the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Enabling the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
The Connection Manager Utility in Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
About the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Exiting the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

14 The Configuration Manager Utility


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Starting the Configuration Manager Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 v


Contents

Password Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52


Use GPS Pathfinder Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Set Printer Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
List of Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Paste Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Lock Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Unlock Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Window Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cascade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
List of Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Help Topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
About Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

15 The Data Transfer Utility


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Standalone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Component Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

vi GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Contents

Add Device wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108


Create New Device Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Types of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

16 Data Collectors
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Preparing a Data Collector Running Asset Surveyor
Software for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Data Collector
Running the Asset Surveyor Software. . . . . . . . . . . 148
MC-V Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Connecting an MC-V Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . 149
TSC1 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Connecting a TSC1 Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . . 151
TDC1 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Connecting a TDC1 Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . . 154
TDC2 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Connecting a TDC2 Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . . 157
GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector . . . 160
Connecting a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector to
Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Preparing a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector for
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer 3
Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
GeoExplorer II Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer II Data Collector. . . 164
Connecting a GeoExplorer II Data Collector to
Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Preparing a GeoExplorer II Data Collector for
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 vii


Contents

File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer II


Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
GeoExplorer Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Receiving an Almanac with a GeoExplorer Data Collector . . . 167
Connecting a GeoExplorer Data Collector to Your Computer. . 167
Preparing a GeoExplorer Data Collector for Data Transfer . . . 168
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer
Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Connecting a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector to
Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Preparing a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector for
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GPS Pathfinder
Basic Data Collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

17 Software
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ASPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Connecting a Field Computer Running ASPEN to
Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Preparing a Field Computer Running ASPEN for
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Field Computer
Running ASPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
TerraSync software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Connecting a CE Device To Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . 179
Preparing a CE Device Running Terrasync for Data Transfer . . 179
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a CE Device
Running the TerraSync Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

vi ii GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Contents

18 GIS Devices and E-mail


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
GIS Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS Folder . . . . . 184
PC Card from a GIS Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Connecting a PC Card To Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS PC Card . . . . 185
E-Mail Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
File Types You Can Transfer To or From an
E-Mail Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

19 GPS Receivers
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4600LS Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Preparing a 4600LS Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . 193
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4600 Receiver . . . 193
Series 4000 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Preparing a Series 4000 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . 194
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a
Series 4000 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4700 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Preparing a 4700 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . 195
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4700 Receiver . . . 195
4800 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Preparing a 4800 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . 196
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4800 Receiver . . . 196
4400 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Preparing a 4400 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . 197
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4400 Receiver . . . 197

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 ix


Contents

20 Types of Files
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Almanac Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Devices You Can Transfer Almanac Files From . . . . . . . . . 201
Background Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Devices You Can Transfer Background Files To or From . . . . 202
Base Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Devices You Can Transfer Base Data Files To or From . . . . . 203
Configuration (.ccf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Devices You Can Transfer Configuration Files To. . . . . . . . 204
Coordinate System (.cse, .dat) Export Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Devices You Can Transfer Coordinate System Export Files
To or From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Data Dictionary (.ddf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Devices You Can Transfer Data Dictionary Files
To or From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Ephemeris (.eph) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Devices You Can Transfer Ephemeris Files To or From . . . . . 209
Geoid Grid Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Devices You Can Transfer Geoid Grid Files To . . . . . . . . . 210
GIS Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Devices You Can Transfer GIS Data Files To or From . . . . . 211
Help (.hlp) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Devices You Can Transfer Help Files To . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Language (.lng) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Devices You Can Transfer Language Files To . . . . . . . . . . 214
Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Devices You Can Transfer Other Files To or From . . . . . . . 215
Raw Observations (.dat files) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Devices You Can Transfer Raw Observations To or From. . . . 216
Station/Session Tables (.tab files) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

x GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Contents

Devices You Can Transfer Station/Session Tables


To or From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Waypoint (.wpt) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Devices You Can Transfer Waypoint Files To or From . . . . . 218

21 Troubleshooting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Trimble Diagnostic Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Connecting To Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

22 The Differential Correction Utility


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Differential GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Factors Affecting Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Obtaining Optimal Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Base Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Centimeter Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Using Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Starting Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Selecting Rover Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Selecting Base Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Confirm Selected Base Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Specifying the Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Confirming Reference Position Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . 248
Generating the Corrected Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Exiting the Differential Correction Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Differential Correction Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Local Search for Base Files Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Internet Search Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Provider Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 xi


Contents

Base Station Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265


Internet Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Security Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Confirm Selected Base Files Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Reference Position Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Confirm Reference Position Adjustments Dialog . . . . . . . . 275
Differential Correction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Internet Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Using Internet Search (First Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Internet Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Select a Base Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Provider Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Performing Internet Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Preventing Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Evaluating Corrected Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Reasons for Incomplete or Inaccurate Correction . . . . . . . . 295
Internet Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
The Batch Processor Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Starting the Batch Processor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Using the Batch Processor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Step 1: Using a Batch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Step 2: Setting Up Data Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Step 3: Setting Up Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Step 4: Setting Up Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Step 5: Setting Up a User Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Exiting the Batch Processor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
The Batch Processor Utility Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

xi i GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Contents

Differential Correction Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330


File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Grouping Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
When to Use the Grouping Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Starting the Grouping Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Using the Grouping Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Exiting the Grouping Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Grouping Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Starting the Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Using the Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Exiting the Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Combine Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
SSF Record Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Starting the SSF Record Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Using the SSF Record Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
SSF Record Editor User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Check SSF Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Starting the Check SSF Files Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Using the Check SSF Files Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Exiting the Check SSF Files Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Check SSF Files Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Change the Selected Input Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Check SSF Files Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
SSF to RINEX Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Starting the SSF to RINEX Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
SSF to RINEX Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
SSF to RINEX Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 xi ii


Contents

Text Conversion Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408


Starting the Text Conversion Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Text Conversion Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

24 Standalone Utilities
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Using the Standalone Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
ADJUST2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
ADJUST2D Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
ASTOSSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
ASTOSSF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
DATREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
DATREF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
FOUR2SSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
FOUR2SSF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
LOAD Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
MULTIDAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
MULTIDAT Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
PFSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PFSTAT Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
RAWTOSSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
RAWTOSSF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
RPDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
RPDD Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
SSFREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SSFREF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SSFTOASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
SSFTOASC Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Index

xi v GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


About This Manual
Welcome to the GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide. This manual
describes how to install, set up, and use the GPS Pathfinder® Office
software.
This software, together with its associated utilities, provides all the
functionality you need to correct, view, and edit GPS data collected in
the field, and to export it in a format suitable for your GIS or CAD
system.
Even if you have used other Global Positioning System (GPS)
products before, Trimble recommends that you spend some time
reading this manual to learn about the special features of this product.
If you are not familiar with GPS, visit our website for an interactive
look at Trimble and GPS at:
• www.trimble.com
Trimble assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Windows and
know how to use a mouse, select options from menus and dialogs,
make selections from lists, and refer to online help.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 xv


About This Manual

Related Information
Other manuals in this set include:
• GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide
This manual introduces the basic principles of using the GPS
Pathfinder Office software. A tutorial introduces some of the
powerful features of the main program and the Batch Processor,
Data Transfer, Differential Correction and Export utilities.
• Mapping Systems General Reference
This manual introduces the basic principles of using GPS to
make maps. It provides the background information you need to
use Trimble Navigation Limited’s mapping products, including
GPS receivers, dataloggers, and software.
Other sources of related information are:
• Help – the software has built-in, context-sensitive help that lets
you quickly find the information you need. Access it from the
Help menu. Alternatively, click the Help button in a dialog, or
press [F1]. This comprehensive help system reads like an online
manual. Use the scroll buttons to move from page to page.
• Readme.txt file – a Readme.txt file contains information added
after the documentation was completed. To read this file,
double-click it or use a text editor to open it. The installation
program also copies it into the program directory.
• Release notes – the release notes describe new features of the
product, information not included in the manuals, and any
changes to the manuals.
• Update notes – there is a warranty activation sheet with this
product. Send it in to automatically receive update notes
containing important information about software and hardware
changes. Contact your local Trimble Dealer for more
information about the support agreement contracts for software
and firmware, and an extended warranty program for hardware.

xv i GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


About This Manual

• ftp.trimble.com – use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to


receive files such as software patches, utilities, service bulletins,
and FAQs. Alternatively, access the FTP site from the Trimble
website at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm.
• Trimble training courses – consider a training course to help
you use your GPS system to its fullest potential. For more
information, visit the Trimble website at
www.trimble.com/support/training.htm

Technical Assistance
If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the
product documentation, contact your local Distributor. Alternatively,
request technical support using the Trimble website at
www.trimble.com/support/support.htm

Your Comments
Your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to
improve it with each revision. To forward your comments, do one of
the following:
• Send an e-mail to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com.
• Complete the Reader Comment Form at the back of this manual
and mail it according to the instructions at the bottom of the
form.
If the reader comment form is not available, send comments and
suggestions to the address in the front of this manual. Please mark it
Attention: Technical Publications Group.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 x vii


About This Manual

Document Conventions
The document conventions are as follows:

Convention Definition
Italics Identifies software menus, menu commands,
dialog boxes, and the dialog box fields.
Helvetica Narrow Represents messages printed on the screen.
Helvetica Bold Identifies a software command button, or
represents information that you must type in a
software screen or window.
“Select Italics / Italics” Identifies the sequence of menus, commands, or
dialog boxes that you must choose in order to
reach a given screen.

[Ctrl] Is an example of a hardware function key that you


must press on a personal computer (PC). If you
must press more than one of these at the same
time, this is represented by a plus sign, for
example, [Ctrl]+[C].

xv iii GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

13
13 The Connection Manager
Utility
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Using the Connection Manager utility
■ The Batch Processor utility
■ Configuring the Connection Manager utility
■ Enabling the Connection Manager utility
■ The Connection Manager utility in operation
■ About the Connection Manager utility
■ Exiting the Connection Manager utility
Connection Manager

13 The Connection Manager Utility – Introduction

13.1 Introduction
The Connection Manager utility is installed as part of a standard GPS
Pathfinder® Office software installation. Its icon appears in the status
bar at the bottom right of the screen, as shown below.

A shortcut for the Connection Manager utility is placed in


\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Startup.
When the Connection Manager utility is disabled, a cross appears
through its icon, as shown below.

Note – The Connection Manager utility is automatically disabled


when the Data Transfer utility is running.
When GPS Pathfinder Office software is first installed the Connection
Manager utility is disabled by default.

C Warning – If ASPEN and GPS Pathfinder Office software are installed on


the same PC there may be a conflict between them. In this situation,
Trimble recommends that you exit the Connection Manager utility
software.

20 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Connection Manager
The Connection Manager Utility – Using the Connection Manager Utility 13

13.2 Using the Connection Manager Utility


Before using the Connection Manager utility it is important to set up
the Batch Processor utility to do the tasks you need to do, such as
differential correction and export. The Connection Manager utility
uses the Batch Processor utility to perform the tasks that you select.
The Batch Processor utility always uses the project specified in the
selected batch setup for saving and writing files.
To use the Connection Manager utility:
• In the status bar, single-click the Connection Manager utility
icon.
The Connection Manager Utility menu appears.
The menu items are described in the following sections.
Before using the Connection Manager utility, you must select an
existing batch setup, or create a new batch setup, in the Batch
Processor utility to do the tasks you need to do, such as differential
correction and export. The Connection Manager utility uses the Batch
Processor utility to perform the tasks that you select. The Batch
Processor utility always uses the specified batch setup to process files.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 21


Connection Manager

13 The Connection Manager Utility – The Batch Processor Utility

13.3 The Batch Processor Utility


The Batch Processor utility must be set up before enabling the
Connection Manager utility. To do this:
1. To run the Batch Processor utility, click , then select
Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Batch Processor.
2. From the Overview dialog, create a new setup or select a
previously-used named setup. Select the tasks you want to
perform and select the project to be used, and click Next to
continue.
3. In the dialogs that follow, select the appropriate batch settings to
specify how your data should be processed. It is important to
select a base file source for differential correction, and an export
setup. For more information, see The Batch Processor Utility,
page 305.
4. Once you have set up the Batch Processor utility, click Close to
save the setup you have selected.
Note – The Connection Manager utility always writes files to the
project folder specified in the selected batch setup. The Connection
Manager utility also always uses base files for differential correction
from the specified project base folder. For more information, refer to
Projects, page 23 in Volume 1 of this User Guide.

22 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Connection Manager
The Connection Manager Utility – Configuring the Connection Manager Utility 13

13.4 Configuring the Connection Manager Utility


Before you use the Connection Manager utility, you must configure it
correctly.
To configure the Connection Manager utility:
1. In the status bar, single-click the Connection Manager utility
icon.
2. From the Connection Manager utility menu, choose the
Configuration command.
The Connection Manager Configuration dialog appears:

B Tip – To quickly access the Connection Manager Configuration dialog, do


one of the following:

– Double-click the Connection Manager utility icon in the


status bar.
– In the Utilities menu of the GPS Pathfinder Office
software, select Other / Connection Manager / Connection
Manager Configuration.
– Click , then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder
Office <version>/ Connection Manager.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 23


Connection Manager

13 The Connection Manager Utility – Configuring the Connection Manager Utility

3. In the Batch Setup group, click the drop-down arrow and select
a batch setup from the list.
Note – The list will contain only those batch setups that have
Data Transfer as one option.
4. Set the countdown time.
The countdown time determines how much time you have to
cancel the data transfer process before it begins. The
Connection Manager countdown dialog appears before the
transfer process begins. Set the countdown time to a value
between 0 and 120 seconds. The default is 10 seconds. If a
value of 0 seconds is set, the Connection Manager countdown
dialog does not appear before the data transfer process starts.
5. Click OK to confirm the settings and close the Connection
Manager Configuration dialog.
The Connection Manager utility is now correctly configured and
shows the device that will be monitored for data transfer. To enable the
Connection Manager utility, you must select the Monitor Device
option in the Connection Manager utility menu.

24 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Connection Manager
The Connection Manager Utility – Enabling the Connection Manager Utility 13

13.5 Enabling the Connection Manager Utility


Before the Connection Manager utility can be used, it must first be
correctly configured and set up to monitor a device.
To enable the Connection Manager utility:
1. Click the Connection Manager utility icon in the status bar.
2. From the Connection Manager utility menu, choose Monitor
Device.
The following dialog appears.

3. Click OK to confirm your intention.


4. The Connection Manager utility icon appears in the status bar
(also known as the system tray) at the bottom right of the screen
without a cross through its icon. This indicates that the
Connection Manager utility is currently monitoring the selected
device. A check mark also appears beside the Monitor Device
command in the Connection Manager utility menu, as shown
below.

Once it is enabled, the Connection Manager utility monitors the


device and automatically runs the Batch Processor utility
without any user interaction.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 25


Connection Manager

13 The Connection Manager Utility – The Connection Manager Utility in Operation

13.6 The Connection Manager Utility in Operation


The Connection Manager utility monitors the selected device and
automatically runs the selected batch processor setup.
The following steps occur when the Connection Manager utility
detects that a device has been connected:
1. When the selected device is connected to the monitored serial
port, the Connection Manager utility starts the Batch Processor
utility.
2. The Batch Processor utility first starts the Data Transfer utility
3. The Data Transfer utility connects to the device and determines
whether there are data files to transfer from the device to the
office computer.
Note – If the connected data collector is a GeoExplorer 3, only
new and updated data files are selected for transfer.
If no files are found for transferring, then the process ends
immediately and the Batch Processor log is displayed with the
message No files found to transfer.
If data files are found, the following dialog appears, showing
the countdown time.

4. If you do not want to transfer files, click Cancel to exit this


dialog.
Click Cancel only if you want to terminate the transfer process.
For more information on file transfer, see Chapter 15, The Data
Transfer Utility.

26 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Connection Manager
The Connection Manager Utility – The Connection Manager Utility in Operation 13

5. If no action is taken, the countdown period elapses and the


Receiving dialog appears, followed by the Converting dialog.
6. The transferred files are processed according to the selected
batch setup.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 27


Connection Manager

13 The Connection Manager Utility – About the Connection Manager Utility

13.7 About the Connection Manager Utility


Information about the Connection Manager utility, including its
version number, is available from the Connection Manager utility
menu.
To display details about the Connection Manager utility:
1. Click the Connection Manager utility icon in the status bar.
2. Select About the Connection Manager in the Connection
Manager utility menu.
This information may be required when requesting technical
assistance.

28 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Connection Manager
The Connection Manager Utility – Exiting the Connection Manager Utility 13

13.8 Exiting the Connection Manager Utility


You do not need to exit the Connection Manager utility between batch
processing sessions. Exit the Connection Manager utility only when
you never want to monitor a device.
To exit the Connection Manager utility:
1. In the status bar, click the Connection Manager utility icon.
2. From the Connection Manager utility menu, select Exit the
Connection Manager.
3. The Connection Manager utility closes and its icon disappears
from the status bar.
You need to start the Connection Manager utility again if you want to
monitor a device connected to a serial port.
To start the Connection Manager utility:
1. In the Utilities menu of the GPS Pathfinder Office software,
select Other / Connection Manager.
2. The Connection Manager utility opens, its icon appears in the
status bar, and the Connection Manager Configuration dialog
appears.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 29


Connection Manager

13 The Connection Manager Utility – Exiting the Connection Manager Utility

30 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

14
14 The Configuration Manager
Utility
■ Introduction
■ Starting the Configuration Manager utility
■ File menu
■ Edit menu
■ View menu
■ Window menu
■ Help menu
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Introduction

14.1 Introduction
The Configuration Manager utility is one of a series of GPS Pathfinder
Office utilities for managing data collection projects. The
Configuration Manager utility provides all the functionality you need
to create a configuration file that can be sent to a GeoExplorer 3 data
collector. A configuration file contains instructions that define, and
optionally lock, the configuration of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
Configuration Manager

The configuration of GeoExplorer 3 data collector determines how


data is collected, entered, displayed, and communicated with external
devices. The Configuration Manager utility provides supervisors with
extensive control over data collection operations carried out in the
field using a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
The following sections describe the user interface and menu
commands, and provide details on how the Configuration Manager
software works.

32 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – Starting the Configuration Manager Utility 14

14.2 Starting the Configuration Manager Utility


Before you can start the Configuration Manager utility, Microsoft
Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder
Office software must be installed. Start the Configuration Manager
utility from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from
Windows.

Configuration Manager
To start the Configuration Manager utility from the GPS Pathfinder
Office software:
• Select Utilities / Other / Configuration Manager from the menu
bar.
To start the Configuration Manager utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> /
Configuration Manager.
When you first start the Configuration Manager utility, the main
window appears:

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 33


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Starting the Configuration Manager Utility

The menu bar provides access to all of the functionality of the


Configuration Manager utility. (The menus displayed in the menu bar
differ depending on whether or not a configuration file is open.) A
toolbar contains tools for frequently used commands. The status bar at
the bottom of the window displays a tip or instruction for to the
selected command.
Configuration Manager

34 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

14.3 File Menu


The File menu groups together commands for managing files. Each
command is described in the following sections.

14.3.1 New

Configuration Manager
Select File / New (or click the New tool on the toolbar) to create a
new configuration file. The Configuration dialog appears:

This dialog lets you name the configuration file, provides access to
password settings, and access to the eight settings tabs.
Configuration name Enter a name for the configuration file.
Password Settings Click this button to open the Password Settings
dialog.

Tabs
Click the tabs to display the configuration settings and their associated
values. When a new configuration file is created, fields are set to
predefined default values.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 35


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

Select an item in a list to change its value. Controls appear in the


group box to the right of the list. Use these controls to change the
value of the selected item, and also optionally lock the value to prevent
users changing the value in the field.
The tabs on the Configuration dialog are described in the following
sections.
Configuration Manager

Data Tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect how data is
collected on a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
Click the Data tab to display a list of data controls and their associated
values:

Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock
the value of the selected item.

36 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

Table 14.1 describes the Data tab fields.


Table 14.1 Data tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Log between Three-option entry field for the logging rate which can be either Off
features a time (seconds or minutes), a distance (meters or feet), or Off.
Use the Time or Distance options to specify the rate at which

Configuration Manager
GPS positions are logged when no feature is being logged.
This provides a trail that shows where the user has travelled
during a data collection session. Use Off to disable this feature.
Log PPRT data Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these No
settings to specify whether or not PPRT data is logged. If users
want to postprocess real-time data using the Differential
Correction utility, they must log PPRT data. This information is
used to prepare the real-time data for postprocessing back in
the office.
Log velocities Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these No
settings to specify whether or not velocity records are logged.
Antenna height Numeric entry field that accepts values up to two decimal 1.00 meter
places. If you enter a valuable with alternative units (for
example, feet), the Configuration Manager converts the value
to meters. Use this field to specify the height that the antenna
will be for data collection. The antenna height is the height of
the GPS antenna above the feature being collected.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 37


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

Table 14.1 Data tab fields (Continued)

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Allow GPS Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these Yes
update settings to specify whether or not positional data can be
updated (replaced). The entries in the pop-up list are:
Yes – When you are updating a feature you can log new GPS
positions. This new data replaces the positional information
Configuration Manager

stored for the feature.


No – When you are updating a feature you cannot update
(replace) the position information stored for that feature. You
can update attributes, but not the position.
Warning Three-option entry field where the Distance option has a value Always
distance in meters. Use these settings to specify the distance to a warn
previously mapped feature within which the user will need to
be, before they are allowed to update that feature.
Specify the warning distance between the original feature and
your current position. If this distance is exceeded, a warning
appears. For example, a warning distance of 5 m means that
you are warned if you try to log GPS positions for a feature that
is more than 5 meters away from the previously collected
position.
NOTE: When you are not using real-time, positions are
accurate to within 100 m. A warning distance of less than 100
m is not accurate unless you are using RTCM in the field.

Filename prefix Text entry field. Use this field to specify the first letter of the file R
name when the file name is automatically generated by the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector.

38 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

GPS Tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect the precision
or quality required for the GPS positions. GPS settings are a critical
parameter for data collection and it is important to configure the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector to best suit the working environment.
Click the GPS tab to display its list of GPS controls and their
associated values:

Configuration Manager
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock
the value of the selected item.
Table 14.2 describes the GPS tab fields.
Table 14.2 GPS tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


GPS settings Drop-down list field with two options (Slider mode and Custom Slider mode
mode mode). Use these settings to specify whether the GPS settings
are defined in terms of a slider (that changes a number of GPS
settings together) or in terms of individual custom GPS setting.

Standard settings
GPS precision Slider with nine levels from High (more accurate) to Low (less Medium
accurate). Use these settings to specify the GPS settings using
a slider that changes a number of settings together. The slider
setting indicates the relative precision required for the GPS
positions collected in the field.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 39


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

Table 14.2 GPS tab fields (Continued)

Field Field type and its purpose Default

Custom settings
PDOP Mask Numeric entry field. Use this field to specify the PDOP value 6.0
above which the GeoExplorer 3 handheld will cease to log and
use GPS positions.
Configuration Manager

SNR Mask Numeric entry field. Use this field to specify the SNR value 4.0
below which the GeoExplorer 3 handheld will cease to use a
satellite to compute positions.
Elevation Mask Numeric entry field. Use this field to specify the minimum 15°
elevation above the horizon above which satellites will be used
to compute a GPS position.
Minimum Drop-down list with three options (3, 4 or 5). Use these settings 5
Satellites to specify the minimum number of satellites that will be used to
compute a GPS position.
2D Altitude Two-option entry field where the Value option has a value in Use last 3D
meters. Use this field to specify how the GeoExplorer 3 GPS
handheld will computer altitude values when operating in 2D
mode. This field is available only if the user selects ‘3’ in the
Minimum satellites field.

40 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

Real-time tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect the
collection of data using RTCM.
Click the Real-time tab to display a list of real-time controls and their
associated values:

Configuration Manager
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock
the value of the selected item.
Table 14.3 describes the Real-time tab fields.
Table 14.3 Real-time tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Mode Drop-down list field with two options: RTCM only (only GPS Best
positions that have been corrected in real-time are recorded) available
and Best available (most accurate positions are recorded). Use
these settings to specify the mode of operation of the
GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
RTCM Age Drop-down list field with five options: 5, 10, 20, 50, and 100 20s
Limit seconds. Use these settings to specify the age at which the
RTCM message is considered to be too old to be useful in
providing differential corrections.
Station ID Two-option entry field where the Value option has a numeric Any
value. Use this field to specify the RTCM Station ID that should
be used to receive real-time corrections. This field is active
when Source is set to Other.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 41


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

Coordinates tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect how
data is collected and displayed.
Click the Coordinates tab to display a list of coordinate controls and
their associated values:
Configuration Manager

Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock
the value of the selected item.
Table 14.4 describes the Coordinates tab fields.
Table 14.4 Coordinates tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


System Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use Latitude/
this button to specify the system that will be used for entering Longitude
and displaying coordinates.
Zone Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use N/A
this button to specify the zone that will be used for calculating
coordinates. The Zone field is not active if System is set to
Latitude/ Longitude.
Datum Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use WGS 1984
this button to specify the datum that will be used for calculating
coordinates.
Altitude Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use MSL
reference this button to specify the altitude reference that will be used for
entering and displaying altitude values.

42 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

Table 14.4 Coordinates tab fields (Continued)

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Geoid Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use DMA 10x10
this button to specify the geoid model that will be used for (Global)
calculating coordinates. This field is available only when the
selected Altitude reference is set to MSL.

Configuration Manager
Coordinate Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use Meters
units this button to specify the units that will be used for entering and
displaying coordinates.
Altitude units Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use Meters
this button to specify the units that will be used for entering and
displaying altitude values.

Units tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect how units of
measure are entered and displayed.
Click the Units tab to display a list of unit controls and their associated
values:

Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the group box at the right of the dialog to set and optionally
lock the value of the selected item.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 43


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

Table 14.5 describes the Units tab fields.


Table 14.5 Units tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Distance Drop-down list field with five options: Meters (m), Feet (ft), Meters
Kilometers (km), Miles (mi) and Nautical miles (nm). Use these
settings to specify the units that will be used to display
Configuration Manager

distances on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.


Area Drop-down list field with six options: Square meters (m2), Square
Square feet (ft2), Hectares (Ha), Acres (A), Square kilometers meters
(km2), and Square miles (mi2). Use these settings to specify
the units that will be used to display areas on the GeoExplorer
3 handheld.
Velocity Drop-down list field with five options: Meters/Second (m/s), Km/Hour
Feet/Seconds (ft/s), Km/Hour (kph), Miles/Hour (mph), and
Knots (kt). Use these settings to specify the units that will be
used to display velocities on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Angle Drop-down list field with four options: Degrees (°), Gradians Degrees
(gon), Rhumbs (rh), and Mils (mil). Use these settings to
specify the units that will be used to enter and display angles
on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
North reference Drop-down list field with two options: True and Magnetic. Use True
these settings to specify the north reference that will be used to
calculate bearings.
Declination Two-option entry field where the Value option has a numeric Auto
value. Use these settings to specify the magnetic declination
that should be used when calculating bearings.

44 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

Formats tab Use this tab to configure the parameters that affect the
formats used to enter and display data.
Click the Formats tab to display a list of format controls and their
associated values:

Configuration Manager
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock
the value of the selected item.
Table 14.6 describes the Formats tab fields.
Table 14.6 Formats tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Language Drop-down list field with six options: Deutsch, English, English
Español, Français, Portugues, and Russian. Use these
settings to specify the language used to run the
GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Offset Drop-down list field with two options: Horz/Vert (horizontal Horz/Vert
and vertical distance) and Slope/Incl (slope distance and
inclination). Use these settings to specify the format for
entering and displaying offsets.
Degrees Drop-down list field with three options: DD°MM’SS.ss", DD°MM’SS.ss"
DD°MM.mmm', and DD.ddd°. Use these settings to
specify the format for entering and displaying angles and
latitude and longitude coordinates.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 45


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

Table 14.6 Formats tab fields (Continued)

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Date Drop-down list field with three options: DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY
MM/DD/YYYY, and YYYY/MM/DD. Use these settings to
specify the date format for entry and display purposes.
Time Drop-down list field with two options: 12 Hour and 24 Hour. 12 Hour
Configuration Manager

Use these settings to specify the time format for entry and
display purposes.
Time zone Numeric entry field. Enter number of hours and minutes + 00h 00m
(either negative or positive). Use this field to specify the
offset from UTC in hours and minutes.
Coordinate Drop-down list field with two options: Lat/Long and Lat/Long
order Long/Lat. Use these settings to specify the coordinate
order for entry and display purposes.

COMMS tab Use this tab to set up the parameters for communication
with external devices. Set these parameters to transfer data to and from
a computer, or to communicate with radios to receive real-time
corrections.
Click the COMMS tab to display a list of communication controls and
their associated values:

Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the In group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally
lock the value of the selected item.

46 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

Table 14.7 describes the COMMS tab fields.


Table 14.7 COMMS tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Data transfer Drop-down list field with three options (Support module, Serial Support
clip, Off). Use this settings to specify how the GeoExplorer 3 module
will communicate with GPS Pathfinder Office.

Configuration Manager
RTCM input Drop-down list field with four options (Support module, Serial Wireless
clip, Cable-free BoB, Off). Use these settings to specify what BoB
real-time device the GeoExplorer 3 is configured to receive
signals from.
NMEA output Drop-down list field with three options (Support module, Serial Off
clip, Off). Use these settings to specify whether the
GeoExplorer 3 handheld generates NMEA output.

Port settings
Input baud rate Drop-down list field with nine options between 110 and 38400. 2400
Use these settings to specify the baud rate for data input (that
is, RTCM).
Output baud Drop-down list field with nine options between 110 and 38400. 2400
rate Use these settings to specify the baud rate for data output (that
is, NMEA).
Data bits Drop-down list field with two options (7 and 8). Use these 8
settings to specify the number of bits in a byte (usually 8). Each
byte is a single piece of information, such as a character or a
number.
Stop bits Drop-down list field with two options (1 and 2). Use these 1
settings to specify the number of stop bits at the end of a byte
(usually 1).
Parity Drop-down list field with three options (None, Even, and Odd). None
Use these settings to specify the parity of a byte. The parity of
a digital message comprising of 0s and 1s is the binary sum
over the length of the byte. A parity error results when one of
the bits in a byte is changed.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 47


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

Other tab Use this tab to set the parameters for the beep volume, and
configure the GeoExplorer 3 data collector to output NMEA
messages.
Click the Other tab to display a list of other controls and their
associated values:
Configuration Manager

Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that
appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock
the value of the selected item.
Table 14.8 describes the Other tab fields.
Table 14.8 Other tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default


Beep Volume Drop-down list field with two options (On and Off). Use these On
settings to specify whether the GeoExplorer 3 handheld beeps
when logging data.
NMEA output Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these 5s
interval settings to specify whether the GeoExplorer 3 handheld
generates NMEA output.

48 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

Table 14.8 Other tab fields

Field Field type and its purpose Default

NMEA Messages
GGA Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these Yes
settings to specify whether or not the GGA messages should
be included in the output. This field is active only when NMEA

Configuration Manager
output is set to Yes.
VTG Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these Yes
settings to specify whether or not the VTG messages should
be included in the output. This field is active only when NMEA
output is set to Yes.

14.3.2 Open
Select File / Open (or click the Open tool on the toolbar) to open
an existing configuration file. The Open dialog appears:

Select the file you want to open to view and/or edit. Click Open to
open the file or Cancel to abandon the action.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 49


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

14.3.3 Close
Select File / Close to close the current configuration file. If there are
unsaved changes in the current configuration file a warning dialog
appears:
Configuration Manager

Click Yes to save changes and close the file, No to close the file
without saving the changes, or Cancel to dismiss the warning dialog
and return to the configuration file.

14.3.4 Save
Select File / Save (or click the Save tool on the toolbar) to save the
current configuration file.
You can save as many times as you like while editing the current
configuration file.
If the file has not been given a name, the following warning message
appears:

Click OK to dismiss the message and enter a name in the


Configuration name field.
If the file has not been saved previously, the Save As dialog appears.

50 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

14.3.5 Save As
Select File / Save As to save a copy of the current configuration file
with a different name. The following dialog appears:

Configuration Manager
Use the Save As dialog to enter a name for the configuration file, and
to determine the drive and folder to which the file will be saved. The
default location for saving the file is the current GPS Pathfinder Office
project. Click Save to complete the action. By default, the file has a
.ccf (Common Configuration file) extension.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 51


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

14.3.6 Password Settings Dialog


Select View / Password Settings, or click the Password Settings
button in the Configuration dialog, to set up task locking for a
GeoExplorer 3 data collector. The following dialog appears:
Configuration Manager

Use this dialog to edit the task locks that are sent to the GeoExplorer 3
data collector when the configuration file is transferred.
Password Use this field to enter a password for the configuration file.
A password consists of between four and eight alphanumeric
characters. This password is used on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector
to unlock tasks and configuration items.
Locked Tasks Use this field to optionally lock settings. The settings
are:
• Data files Locking data file deletion prevents the user from
deleting any data files on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.

52 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

• Data dictionary files Locking data dictionary file setup


prevents the user from editing any data dictionary files on the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
Locking data dictionary selection prevents the user from
selecting a different data dictionary for use on the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector. The data dictionary most recently
sent to, or used by, the GeoExplorer 3 data collector will be

Configuration Manager
used.
• Feature settings Locking feature setup prevents the user from
editing any feature settings in any data dictionary on the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
• Waypoints Locking waypoint deletion prevents the user from
deleting any waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
Locking waypoint editing prevents the user from editing any
existing waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector. New
waypoints can still be created.
• Reset to factory settings Locking the ability to reset the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector to the factory settings prevents the
user from resetting the GeoExplorer 3 data collector to the state
it was when first purchased. If the GeoExplorer 3 data collector
is reset to factory settings any changes that have been made to
the setup of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector will be lost.
• Reset Receiver Locking reset receiver prevents the user from
restarting the GeoExplorer 3 GPS receiver. If the receiver is
reset, the current almanac data will be deleted and the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector will take several minutes to re-
acquire satellites and generate positions.
• Reset Upgrade mode Locking upgrade mode prevents the user
from transferring new GeoExplorer 3 software to the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector. When transferring new software
all data files and settings on the data collector are lost.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 53


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu

14.3.7 Use GPS Pathfinder Office Settings


Select File / Use GPS Pathfinder Office Settings to set the
Configuration Manager utility to use the current GPS Pathfinder
Office settings as its default settings. This applies to the settings on the
Units, Coordinates, and Formats tab. When the Use GPS Pathfinder
Office Settings is selected, a checkmark appears beside the command
in the File menu. If a checkmark is present, the settings in a new
Configuration Manager

configuration file will always reflect the current GPS Pathfinder Office
setup.

14.3.8 Print Setup


Select File / Print Setup to set up a printer. This generally involves
selecting paper size and orientation, but different printers have
different options. Use this command only when you want to print to a
printer other that the one currently setup in their Windows
environment.

14.3.9 Set Printer Font


Select File / Set Printer Font to select the printer font for printing the
configuration file. The standard Font dialog appears, allowing you to
select the font name, type, and size to be used. A sample of the font is
displayed.

14.3.10 Print Preview


Select File / Print Preview to see a preview of the printed pages before
printing. This is useful for checking that the page layout and font are
correct before actually sending it to the printer.

54 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14

14.3.11 Print
Select File / Print (or click the Print tool on the toolbar) to send
the current configuration file to the printer. The dialog that appears
depends on the selected printer.

14.3.12 List of Files

Configuration Manager
Select File / FileName.ccf to open a recently opened configuration file.

14.3.13 Exit
Select File / Exit to close the Configuration Manager utility. You are
prompted to save any unsaved configuration files.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 55


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Edit menu

14.4 Edit menu


The Edit menu groups together commands for editing fields in the
configuration files. Each command is described in the following
sections.

Copy Group
Configuration Manager

14.4.1

Select Edit / Copy Group (or click the Copy Group tool on the
toolbar) to copy the selected group.

14.4.2 Paste Group


Select Edit / Paste Group (or click the Paste Group tool on the
toolbar) to paste the previously copied group.

14.4.3 Lock Group


Select Edit / Lock Group (or click the Lock Group tool on the
toolbar) to password-lock all of the settings on the current page of the
current configuration file. This command checks the Password locked
check box for all of the settings on the current page.

14.4.4 Unlock Group


Select Edit / Unlock Group (or click the Unlock Group tool on the
toolbar) to unlock all of the settings that are password locked on the
current page of the current configuration file. This command clears the
Password locked check box for all of the settings on the current page.

56 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – View Menu 14

14.5 View Menu


The View menu groups together commands for configuring the
Configuration Manager utility window. Each command is described in
the following sections.

Toolbar

Configuration Manager
14.5.1

Select View / Toolbar to display or hide the toolbar.


By default the toolbar is displayed. Select this menu option to hide the
toolbar and remove the tick beside the Toolbar menu command.

14.5.2 Status Bar


Select View / Status Bar to display or hide the status bar.
By default, the status bar is displayed. Select this menu option to hide
the status bar and remove the tick beside the Status Bar menu
command.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 57


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Window Menu

14.6 Window Menu


The Window menu groups together commands for managing the
display of configuration files in the Configuration Manager utility
window. Each command is described in the following sections.

Cascade
Configuration Manager

14.6.1

Select Window / Cascade to arrange all open configuration files in a


cascading fashion.

14.6.2 Tile
Select Window / Tile to arrange all open configuration files in a tiled
fashion.

14.6.3 Arrange Icons


Select Window / Arrange Icons to arrange all minimized open
configuration files icons in a orderly fashion across the bottom of the
Configuration Manager utility window.

14.6.4 List of Configuration Files


Select Window / FileName.ccf to make an open file active (that is,
bring it to the front for viewing and editing).

58 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Configuration Manager Utility – Help Menu 14

14.7 Help Menu


The Help menu groups together commands for viewing information
about the Configuration Manager utility. Each command is described
in the following sections.

Help Topics

Configuration Manager
14.7.1

Select Help / Help Topics to display the Configuration Manager online


help.

B Tip – Pressing [F1] while the focus is on an object takes you to the online
help showing information regarding that object.

14.7.2 About Configuration Manager


Select Help / About Configuration Manager (or click the About tool
on the toolbar) to display the About Configuration Manager
dialog. This dialog provides important information about the
Configuration Manager version number and copyright.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 59


14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Help Menu
Configuration Manager

60 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

15
15 The Data Transfer Utility
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Overview
■ Add Device wizard
Related chapters:
■ Chapter 16, Data Collectors
■ Chapter 17, Software
■ Chapter 18, GIS Devices and E-mail
■ Chapter 19, GPS Receivers
■ Chapter 20, Types of Files
■ Chapter 21, Troubleshooting
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Introduction

15.1 Introduction
The Data Transfer utility is produced by Trimble Navigation Limited
for transferring data between a variety of data collection devices and
an office computer. It runs under Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me,
or 2000.
The Data Transfer utility can run in two modes: standalone mode and
component mode.
The Data Transfer Help contains topics to help you transfer data in
both modes. The Help system uses icons to help you identify
information that relates only to one mode:
This icon appears when information is relevant only to
transferring data in standalone mode.
This icon appears when information is relevant only to
transferring data in component mode.
The Help system covers all aspects of the Data Transfer utility. You
will usually only have either the Trimble Geomatics Office software or
the GPS Pathfinder Office software installed on your computer, not
both, so some information in this help system will not be relevant to
Data Transfer

you. The Data Transfer Help uses icons to help you identify such
information:
This icon appears when information is relevant only to a
Trimble GIS and Mapping product, such as:
• the GeoExplorer 3 data collector
• a file type that can only be transferred to or from a GIS device
The Help system assumes a basic familiarity with the devices that you
will be using, and an understanding of the different file types you can
transfer.

62 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

15.2 Overview
The Data Transfer utility uses a device definition to store information
about each individual piece of equipment (called a device) you
connect to it. The first task when transferring files to or from a device
is to create a device definition for it with the Add Device wizard. For
more information, see page 93.
Once a device definition exists for a device, you can use the Data
Transfer utility to transfer files to or from it whenever it is connected
to your office computer.
The Data Transfer utility is part of the Trimble Geomatics Office
software and the GPS Pathfinder Office software. The software you
run the Data Transfer utility from affects the types of devices it can
connect to, the file types you can transfer, and the way the Data
Transfer utility works.

15.2.1 Standalone Mode


The Data Transfer utility can run in two modes: standalone mode and
component mode. When you run the Data Transfer utility in

Data Transfer
standalone mode, you transfer files using the Data Transfer utility
only. You use dialogs and functions within the Data Transfer utility to:
• select files
• prepare data for transfer
• communicate with devices
• transfer files
With the Data Transfer utility you can transfer files to and from survey
GPS receivers, GIS devices, such as a GeoExplorer 3 data collector,
and survey devices, such as a data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software, or a GPS receiver.
When you run the Data Transfer utility as a standalone utility, you can
transfer files into any location on your computer, not just a project
folder.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 63


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Although the standalone Data Transfer utility does not require you to
transfer files to or from a project, the default transfer location for GIS
files is the currently selected GPS Pathfinder Office project.
The Data Transfer utility runs in standalone mode whenever you start
it from:
• the GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities menu
• the GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities toolbar
• a shortcut
This icon indicates help that applies to the standalone Data
Transfer utility.
• Transferring from a GIS device
• Transferring to a GIS device

Open dialog (transferring files to a survey receiver with the


standalone Data Transfer utility)
Use the Open dialog to select files to transfer to a survey receiver, and
to specify the file format you want to convert files into.
Data Transfer

To display the Open dialog, select the Send tab in the Data
Transfer dialog, then click Add
The controls you can see and use in the Open dialog depend on the
type of file you have chosen to send and the type of device you are
sending files to. The Open dialog contains the following:

Option Description
Look in This field shows the name of the current folder.
Double-click on folders or use the Up tool to move
around in the folder hierarchy.
Up Select this tool to move to the previous level of the
folder hierarchy.
New Select this tool to add a new folder in the current
folder.

64 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Option Description
List Select this tool to show only the icons and names of
files in the current folder.
Details Select this tool to show full file details of files in the
current folder.
List of files The folders and files matching the selected file type
appear in this list. Select a file to add it to the File
name field.
File name The names of the files you have selected appear in
this field.
Files of type This list shows the file types you can send to this
device. The only option for a survey receiver is
Station/Session tables.
Destination Shows the name of the device you are sending files to.
File format Select a format from this list, if it is available, to convert
files into that format before they are sent to the device.
Select When you have selected the files you want to send to
the survey receiver, click Select to close this dialog
and return to the Data Transfer dialog. The selected

Data Transfer
files appear in the Files to Send list.

15.2.2 Component Mode


The Data Transfer utility can run in two modes: component mode and
standalone mode. When you run the Data Transfer utility as a
component of the GPS Pathfinder Office software, the Data Transfer
utility connects to devices and transfers files, but you use the dialogs
and commands of the office software to:
• select files to send or receive
• specify the file type you want to send or receive
• select a destination on your computer to transfer files into
• prepare data for transfer to a data collector.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 65


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

For example, to transfer files from a data collector running the


Trimble Survey Controller software, you can use the Import
dialog in the Trimble Geomatics Office software to select the
type of file you want to transfer, then open the Data Transfer
utility's Open dialog for the actual transfer of files. This is an
example of running the Data Transfer utility as a component of
another application (in this case, the Trimble Geomatics Office
software). The files are transferred into the current project in the
Trimble Geomatics Office software.
This icon indicates Help that applies to running the Data
Transfer utility as a component.

Running the Data Transfer utility as a component of the


GPS Pathfinder Office software
The GPS Pathfinder Office software is designed for processing GPS
data collected in the field.
Usually, when you run the Data Transfer utility from within the GPS
Pathfinder Office software, it runs in standalone mode. Although you
start the Data Transfer utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities
Data Transfer

menu or the toolbar, the Data Transfer utility behaves as if you had run
it from a shortcut, and does not interact with any other part of the GPS
Pathfinder Office software.
When you use the Batch Processor utility, you run the Data Transfer
utility as a component of the GPS Pathfinder Office software. A batch
setup may include:
• a device definition from those you have set up in the Data
Transfer utility
• a correction setup from the Differential Correction utility
• an export setup from the Export utility.

66 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

You use the Batch Processor utility, not the Data Transfer utility, to
select the device definition. When you run the batch setup, the Data
Transfer utility connects to the selected device. If you specified
manual selection of files, the Data Transfer Open dialog appears, and
you can select any data files from the device. If you chose to transfer
all files, or new files only, the Open dialog does not appear, and the
Data Transfer utility transfers the files automatically.

15.2.3 Devices
A device is a piece of equipment that you store GPS, mapping, or
surveying data on. Some examples of devices are:
• GPS receivers
• data collectors which store feature and attribute information
with GPS positions
• PC cards, which can be inserted into data collectors to provide
extra storage space
Before the Data Transfer utility can connect to a device, you must use

Data Transfer
the Add Device wizard to create a device definition. For more
information, see page 108. The wizard stores information about the
device including its type, connection, and communication details.
When the device is disconnected from the PC, its definition in the
Data Transfer utility still remains. When the device is reconnected,
you can start communication with the equipment by selecting the
device's definition in the Data Transfer utility.
The Data Transfer utility lets you define
• GPS receiver devices
• five types of GIS device
• four types of survey device

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 67


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Types of Devices
To connect to a device with the GPS Pathfinder Office software, you
must create a device definition using the correct device type, as shown
in the list below.
For information about each device, the file types you can transfer to or
from it, and its connection details, click on its name or icon.
Table 15.1 Types of Devices

If you want to connect to a ... select this device type ...


GeoExplorer 3 GIS datalogger

GeoExplorer II GIS datalogger

GeoExplorer GIS datalogger

CE device running the TerraSync software GIS datalogger on


Windows CE
TSC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
Data Transfer

TDC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger

TDC2 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger

MC-V running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger

PC card from a GIS data collector GIS PC card

Folder on your computer or network GIS folder

E-mail account E-mail device

Field computer running the ASPEN software GIS datalogger

68 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Table 15.1 Types of Devices (Continued)

If you want to connect to a ... select this device type ...


Pathfinder Basic GIS datalogger

4600LS receiver GPS receiver

4700 receiver GPS receiver

4800 receiver GPS receiver

Series 4000 receiver GPS receiver

7400 receiver GPS receiver

Transferring files from a GIS device


Note – Before you transfer files from the device, connect it to your
computer and prepare it for transfer.

Data Transfer
The tasks required depend on the type of device.
To transfer files from a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office /
Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 69


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

The Device list contains the devices defined in the Data


Transfer utility. If the device you want to connect to is not
listed, click Devices then New in the Devices dialog to run
the Add Device wizard.
2. Select the Receive tab.
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files
from.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device.
When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right
changes to show the device is connected, and the status line
under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where
<device> represents the type of device, such as GeoExplorer 3
data collector.

4. Click Add and select the type of file you want to transfer from
the list that appears. The files you can transfer depend on the
type of device connected.
Data Transfer

The Open dialog appears. Its appearance depends on the type of


file you selected for transfer. The Look in field shows the device
name, and the list shows the files of the specified type that are
stored on the device.
5. Select the files you want to transfer.
6. In the Destination field, type the folder on your computer or
network you want to copy the files to.
Alternatively, click Browse to display the Browse for Folder
dialog, select a folder, and click OK to copy the selected folder
and its path to the Destination dialog.

70 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

B Tip – The default destination folder is the current GPS Pathfinder Office
project folder. You can change the default folder by changing the selected
project in the GPS Pathfinder Office software or with the Project Changer
utility.

7. Click Open.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data
Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to
Receive list.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to select more files for transfer. They
do not have to be the same file type as you have already
selected.
9. Click Transfer All.
The Receiving dialog appears, showing the progress of the
transferring of the selected files. When all files have been
transferred, the Converting dialog appears as the files are
converted from the device's file format.
Note – Version 1.20 of the TerraSync software supports data

Data Transfer
files that include Filename attributes. A Filename attribute lets
you specify a file, such as a sound or image file, to attach to the
feature. The value of the attribute is the path to and filename of
the attached file. If any data file that you transfer has files
attached to it, these attached files are transferred with the data
file and are stored in a subfolder of the destination folder. The
name of this subfolder is the data file's name with the extension
".files". For example, if the data file is Seaview.ssf, its attached
files are stored in the folder Seaview.files, directly under the
folder that you transferred Seaview.ssf to.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
10. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click
No to close the message box.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 71


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Transferring files from a survey receiver


Note – Before you transfer files from any device, you should connect it
to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required
depend on the type of device.
To transfer files from a survey device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Receive tab.
The Device list contains all the devices defined in the Data
Transfer utility. If necessary, you can click Devices then New in
the Devices dialog to run the Add Device wizard and add a
Data Transfer

device to the list.


3. From the Device list, select the device that you want to transfer
files from.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device.
When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right
changes to show the device is connected, and the status line
under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where
<device> represents the type of device, such as a 4800 receiver.

4. Click Add.
The Open dialog appears. The Look in list shows the device
name, and the list shows the files that are stored on the device.

72 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

5. From the Files of Type list, select the file type that you want to
transfer from the selected device. The list of files available
depends on the type of device selected.
6. Select the files you want to transfer.
7. If necessary, select an option from the File format list to convert
files into this format when they are received from the device.
8. The Destination field defaults to the last location you
transferred files from this device into. In the Destination field,
type the folder on your computer or network you want to copy
the files to.
Alternatively, click Browse to display the Browse for Folder
dialog, select a folder, and click OK to copy the selected folder
and its path to the Destination dialog.
9. Click Open.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data
Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to
Receive list.

Data Transfer
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 to select more files for transfer. They
do not have to be the same file type as you have already
selected.
11. Click Transfer All.
The Receiving dialog appears, showing the progress of the
transfer of the selected files. When all files have been received,
the Converting dialog appears as the files are converted to the
required file format.
A message appears to warn of any problems or errors that
occurred.
12. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click
No to close the message dialog.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 73


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Transferring files to a GIS device


Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to
your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend
on the type of device.
To transfer files to a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office /
Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
The Device list contains all the devices defined in the Data
Transfer utility. If the device you want to connect to is not
Data Transfer

listed, click Devices then New in the Devices dialog to run


the Add Device wizard.
2. Select the Send tab.
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files
to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device.
When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right
changes to show the device is connected, and the status line
under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where
<device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3
data collector.

74 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

4. Click Add and select the type of file you want to transfer from
the list that appears. The files you can transfer depend on the
type of device connected.
The Open dialog appears. The Look in list shows the last folder
you selected files from for this device, the Files of Type list
shows the files type you selected, and the main list shows the
folders and files of that type in that folder.

B Tip – The default folder is the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
You can change the default folder by changing the selected project in the
GPS Pathfinder Office software or with the Project Changer utility.

5. From the main list, select the files you want to transfer.
6. If necessary, select an option from the Destination group to
copy files to the main memory of the data collector or to a PC
card installed on the data collector.
7. Click Open.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data
Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to

Data Transfer
Send list.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to select more files for transfer. You
can add different file types to this list.
9. Click Transfer All.
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from
the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the
Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring
of the selected files.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 75


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Note – Version 1.20 of the TerraSync software supports data


files that include Filename attributes. A Filename attribute lets
you specify a file, such as a sound or image file, to attach to the
feature. The value of the attribute is the path to and filename of
the attached file. If any data file that you transfer has files
attached to it, these attached files are transferred with the data
file and are stored on the CE device under the TerraSync data
folder.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
10. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click
No to close the message box.

Transferring files to a survey receiver


Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to
your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend
on the type of device.
To transfer files to a survey device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
Data Transfer

– From the desktop:


Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
– In the Trimble Geomatics Office software:
Close any open project, then select Utilities / Data
Transfer.
Close any open project, then click the Data Transfer
shortcut in the Utilities group of the project bar.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.

76 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

2. The Device list contains all the devices defined in Data Transfer.
If necessary, you can click Devices then New in the Devices
dialog to run the Add Device wizard and add a device to the list.
3. From the Device list, select the device that you want to transfer
files to.
Data Transfer tries to connect to the selected device. When
connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right
changes to show the device is connected, and the status line
under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where
<device> represents the type of device, such as a 4800 receiver.

4. Click Add.
The Open dialog appears. The Look in list shows the last folder
you selected files from for this device, and the main list shows
the folders and files in that folder.
5. From the Files of Type list, select the file type that you want to
send to the selected device. The list of files available depends on

Data Transfer
the type of device selected.
6. If necessary, use the Look in list and the list box to change the
selected drive and folder.
7. From the main list, select the files you want to transfer.
8. If necessary, select an option from the File format list to convert
files into this format when they are sent to the device.
9. Click Select.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data
Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to
Send list.
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 to select more files for transfer. They
do not have to be the same file type as you have already
selected.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 77


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

11. Click Transfer All.


The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from
the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the
Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transfer of
the selected files.
A message appears to warn of any problems or errors that
occurred.
12. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click
No to close the message dialog.

Transferring background files to a GIS device


Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to
your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend
on the type of device.
Note – In order to use a bitmap (raster) file as a background file, it
must be georeferenced to its location on the earth. Some GIS programs
and utilities can georeference bitmap files. A georeferenced bitmap file
has a world (.wld) file of the same name. Data Transfer can only
Data Transfer

transfer a raster file as a background if there is a corresponding world


file in the same folder.
To transfer background files to a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office /
Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.

78 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

2. Select the Send tab.


3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files
to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device.
When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right
changes to show the device is connected, and the status line
under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where
<device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3
data collector.

4. Click Add and select Background from the list that appears.
The Load Background Files dialog appears.
The list shows all the background files you have identified in the
GPS Pathfinder Office software or the Data Transfer utility. If a
file in the list cannot be sent to the selected device, it is shown
as unavailable.

Data Transfer
5. If the background file you want is not in the list, click Add. The
Add Background Files dialog appears.
Browse for the file you want to add, highlight it and click Open.
The Add Background Files dialog closes. The file you selected
is added to the list in the Load Background Files dialog.
6. Select the check box beside each background file you want to
transfer. Clear the check box beside any file you do not want to
transfer.
7. Click OK.
The Load Background Files dialog closes and you are returned
to the Data Transfer dialog. The background files you selected
are added to the Files to Send list.
8. Click Transfer All.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 79


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from


the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the
Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring
of the selected files.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
9. Click Yes to view the message log in Notepad. Click No to
close the message box.

Transferring a coordinate system to a GIS device


Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to
your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend
on the type of device.

C Warning – The TerraSync software only uses the last coordinate system
or coordinate system file you transferred. To make more than one
coordinate system available on a CE device running the TerraSync
software, you must use the Coordinate System Manager utility to create a
.cse file containing all the coordinate systems and sites you require, and
then transfer it as a Coordinate System Export file.
Data Transfer

To transfer a coordinate system to a GIS device:


1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office /
Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Send tab.

80 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files
to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device.
When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right
changes to show the device is connected, and the status line
under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where
<device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3
data collector.

4. Click Add and select Coordinate System from the list that
appears.
The Coordinate System dialog appears.
5. Select the site, coordinate system, zone, datum, and geoid you
want to transfer.
6. Click OK.
The Coordinate System dialog closes and you are returned to the

Data Transfer
Data Transfer dialog. The coordinate system you selected are
added to the Files to Send list.
7. Click Transfer All.
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from
the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the
Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring
of the selected files.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
8. Click Yes to view the message log in Notepad. Click No to
close the message box.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 81


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Transferring waypoint files to a GIS device


Note – Before you transfer files from device, you should connect it to
your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend
on the type of device.
To transfer waypoint files to a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office /
Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Send tab.
Data Transfer

3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files
from. The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected
device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at
top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status
line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>,
where <device> represents the type of device, such as a
GeoExplorer 3 data collector.

4. Select the Receive tab.


5. Click Add and select Waypoint from the list that appears.
6. The Open dialog appears. Browse for the waypoint file that
contains the waypoints you want to transfer, then highlight the
file and click Open.

82 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

The Open dialog closes and the Waypoint Filter dialog appears.
7. Select the waypoint range you want to send. In the Filter group,
select All to send the entire file, or select Range to send selected
waypoints only.
8. If you selected Range, enter the range of waypoints to send in
the Start and End fields.
9. In the Start position in datalogger field, enter the number you
want to start numbering the transferred waypoints from. If you
have waypoints on the device that you do not want to overwrite,
enter a number that is greater than the highest existing waypoint
number.
10. Click OK.
The Waypoint Filter dialog closes and you are returned to the
Data Transfer dialog. The waypoint file you selected is added to
the Files to Send list. If you selected a waypoint range, the range
is added to the filename.
11. Click Transfer All.

Data Transfer
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from
the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the
Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring
of the selected files.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
12. Click Yes to view the message log in Notepad. Click No to
close the message box.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 83


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Transferring waypoints from a GIS device


Note – Before you transfer files from any device, you should connect it
to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required
depend on the type of device.
To transfer waypoint files from a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office /
Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Receive tab.
Data Transfer

3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files
to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device.
When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right
changes to show the device is connected, and the status line
under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where
<device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3
data collector.

4. Click Add and select Waypoint from the list that appears.
5. The Open dialog appears. Browse for the waypoint file that
contains the waypoints you want to transfer, then highlight the
file and click Open.

84 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

The Open dialog closes and the Waypoint Filter dialog appears.
6. Select the waypoint range you want to receive. In the Filter
group, select All to transfer the entire file, or select Range to
transfer selected waypoints only.
7. If you selected Range, enter the range of waypoints to receive in
the Start and End fields.
8. In the Output File field, enter the full path and filename where
you want to store the transferred waypoints on your office
computer, or click Browse to browse for a folder.
9. Click OK.
The Waypoint Filter dialog closes and you are returned to the
Data Transfer dialog. The waypoint file you selected is added to
the Files to Receive list. If you selected a waypoint range, the
range is added to the filename.
10. Click Transfer All.
The Receiving dialog appears, showing the progress of the
transferring of the selected files. When all files have been

Data Transfer
transferred, the Converting dialog appears as the files are
converted from the device's file format.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
11. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click
No to close the message box.

Data Transfer dialog


The Data Transfer dialog is the main dialog of the Data Transfer
utility. It appears when you start the Data Transfer utility in
standalone mode.
From the Data Transfer dialog you can:
• select the device you want to work with
• preview a list of files to send or receive

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 85


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

• add files to the list or remove them


• begin a transfer
• change global settings
• view or add devices
To open the Data Transfer dialog, do one of the following:
• In GPS Pathfinder Office:
– Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
– Select the Data Transfer tool on the Utilities toolbar.

Devices
Click Devices to open the Devices dialog where you can view a list of
devices, view properties for a device, or rename, delete, or add
devices, as shown in Table 15.2.
Table 15.2 Devices dialog contents

Option Description
Data Transfer

This icon represents the transfer direction (sending


or receiving), the type of device selected, and the
Status icon connection status (connected or disconnected). For
example, the icon above shows that the computer
is connected to a data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software and is ready to receive
files.
Receive tab Use the Receive tab to select files from a device
and transfer them to your computer.
Send tab Use the Send tab to select files on your computer
and transfer them to a device.
Settings Click Settings to open the Global Settings dialog
where you can set properties that apply to all
transfer operations on all devices.

86 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Receive tab
Use the Receive tab on the Data Transfer dialog to select files from a
device and transfer them to your computer.

Table 15.3 shows the contents of the Receive tab.


Table 15.3 Receive tab contents

Option Description

Data Transfer
Files to Receive This list shows the files you have selected to
receive from the device. If you have not selected
any files yet, the message Press Add to select files
appears. Use Add, Remove, and Remove All to
edit the list of files, and use Transfer All to
transfer all of the files shown.
Add Click Add to add files to the Files to Receive list.
Remove Click Remove to clear the selected file in the Files
to Receive list. Removing a file from this list does
not delete it from the device.
Remove All Click Remove All to clear the Files to Receive list.
Removing files from this list does not delete them
from the device, the Files to Send list, or the Files to
Receive list for other devices.
Transfer All Click Transfer All to copy all the files shown in the
Receive tab to the office PC from the device.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 87


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Send tab
Use the Send tab on the Data Transfer dialog to select files on your
computer and transfer them to a device.

Table 15.4 shows the contents of the Send tab.


Table 15.4 Send tab contents

Option Description
Data Transfer

Files to Send This list shows the files you have selected to send
to the device. If you have not selected any files yet,
the message Press Add to select files appears. Use
Add, Remove, and Remove All to edit the list of
files, and use Transfer All to transfer all of the
files shown.
Add Click Add to add files to the Files to Send list.
Remove Click Remove to clear the selected file in the Files
to Send list. Removing a file from this list does not
delete it from the office PC.
Remove All Click Remove All to clear the Files to Send list.
Removing files from this list does not delete them
from the office PC, the Files to Receive list, or the
Files to Send list for other devices.

88 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Table 15.4 Send tab contents

Option Description
Transfer All Click Transfer All to copy all the files shown in the
Send tab to the device.
Retain File List for this This check box controls whether the list of files is
Data Transfer Session retained after transfer. Select it to leave the files in
the Files to Send list after you click Transfer All.
Clear it to remove all files sent from the list after
they have been transferred.

Control menu
The control menu groups together commands to control the Data
Transfer application window.
To display the control menu, click the Data Transfer icon at the top
left of the title bar of the Data Transfer dialog, or right click anywhere
on the title bar.

Select ... to ...

Data Transfer
Restore restore the application window to its previous size
and location
Move move the window using arrow keys
Size resize the window using arrow keys
Minimize reduce the window to an icon on the Taskbar
Maximize enlarge the application window to full screen
Close quit Data Transfer and close the application
window
About Data Transfer display the About Data Transfer dialog
Refresh refresh the Data Transfer dialog and re-connect to
the selected device
New copy of Data open another copy of Data Transfer
Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 89


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

About Data Transfer dialog


The About Data Transfer dialog contains important copyright and
licensing information, including the version of the software, your
registration name, and your serial number.
To display the About Data Transfer dialog, select About Data
Transfer from the Control menu.
Note – It is not permissible to copy this program except for archival
and backup purposes.

Global Settings dialog


Use the Global Settings dialog to set properties for the Data Transfer
utility. These properties apply to all transfer operations to or from any
device. The settings are saved when you close the Data Transfer
utility, so they remain the same until you change them.
To open the Global Settings dialog from the standalone Data
Transfer utility, click Settings in the Data Transfer dialog. The
options are shown in Table 15.5
Data Transfer

Table 15.5 Global Settings dialog contents

Option Description
Query file overwrites If the file you are transferring has the same name
as an existing file, it overwrites the existing file.
Select this check box to display a message
requiring confirmation before overwriting. Clear the
check box to overwrite existing files without asking
for confirmation.
Make backup copies of Select this check box to create backup copies of
data files files on your computer after they have been
transferred to a device.
Delete files on device Select this check box to delete files on the device
after transfer after they have been successfully transferred to
your computer. Clear the check box to leave the
transferred files on the device after they have been
copied to your computer.

90 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Devices dialog
The Devices dialog lets you see a list of the devices you have defined
so far in the Data Transfer utility.
You can add, delete, or rename devices, and view device properties.
To open this dialog from the standalone Data Transfer utility,
click Devices in the Data Transfer dialog

Data Transfer
Table 15.6 shows the contents of the Devices dialog.
Table 15.6 Devices dialog contents

Option Description
Devices This list shows all the devices that have been
defined so far. To rename a device, right-click on it
and from the menu select Rename. You can also
right-click to delete the device or view its Properties
dialog.
New Click New to start the Add Device wizard and add a
new device.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 91


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Table 15.6 Devices dialog contents (Continued)

Option Description
Delete Select a device and click Delete to remove the
device definition from the list. To connect to the
device after you have deleted you must use the Add
Device wizard to add a new device.
Properties Select a device and click Properties to open the
Properties dialog for that device.

Properties dialog
The Properties dialog shows the connection settings for the devices
you have already defined.
To display the Properties dialog for a device when running the
Data Transfer utility in standalone mode, do one of the
following:
• Select the device and click Properties in the Devices dialog.
• Right-click on the device in the Devices dialog and from the
shortcut menu select Properties.
Data Transfer

To display the Properties dialog when running the Data


Transfer utility from another application, right-click on the
device in the Open dialog or the Save As dialog and from the
shortcut menu select Properties.
The tabs available on the Properties dialog depend on the type of
device connected:
The Device Properties tab appears when the device is one of the
following:
• GPS receiver (4000 Series)
• GPS receiver (5000 Series)
• GIS data collector
• GIS PC card
• GIS folder

92 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

The Device Properties tab (E-mail devices only) appears when the
device is a GIS E-mail device.
The Download Properties tab appears when the device is a GPS
receiver (4000 Series).
The Conversion Properties tab appears when the device is a GPS
receiver (5000 Series).
The Connection Settings dialog from the Microsoft ActiveSync
software appears when the device is a GIS data collector on Windows
CE.
The standard Windows Explorer disk drive or folder property dialogs
appear when the device is a Survey data card.

Device Properties tab


The Device Properties tab on the Properties dialog shows the general
connection properties of devices.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 93


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Table 15.7 shows the contents in the Device Properties tab:


Table 15.7 Device Properties tab contents

Option Description
Class Shows the general type of the device. It matches
the device type you selected in the Add Device
wizard.
For example, it may show GPS receiver or Survey
Controller, or GIS data collector.
Type Shows more specific details of the type of the
device, if applicable. For example, if the Class field
shows GPS receiver, this field shows the receiver
model, or if the Class field shows GIS folder, the
Type field shows the data collector type the folder
represents.
Port Shows the serial (COM) port the device is
connected to.
TIP: To change the port a device is connected to,
you must delete the device definition and create a
new definition that uses the new port. You cannot
change the selected port here.
Data Transfer

Location If the device is a GIS folder or PC card, the Location


field appears instead of the Port field. This shows
the drive or folder a PC card is connected as, or the
path of a folder device.
 
            

    

    

      
 

Note – This control is not available if the
receiver is a mapping receiver.

94 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Table 15.7 Device Properties tab contents (Continued)

Option Description
 
         

 
   

    
 
   

  
    
Select ... to use ...
Hardware flow control commands generated by the
(RTS/CTS) receiver.

Software flow control commands generated by Data


(XON/XOFF) Transfer.
Note – This control is not available if the receiver
is a mapping receiver.

           ! 


"

 
  
   
"
 !  
  
 
     
     

  
 
 
 ! 

Data Transfer
Note – This control is not available if the receiver
is a mapping receiver.

#
       !
 ! 
"

  
 !
 ! 
"
 !    

 
  
Note – This control is not available if the receiver
is a mapping receiver.

 !        ! ! 


"

 
  
 ! 
"
 !  
  
 
     
     

  
 
 
 ! 
Note – This control is not available if the receiver
is a mapping receiver.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 95


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Table 15.7 Device Properties tab contents (Continued)

Option Description
Max retries Enter a value in this field or cycle through the
values to specify the number of times the Data
Transfer utility tries to transfer files to or from this
device if the connection is lost during transfer.
Timeout (secs) Enter a value in this field or cycle through the
values to specify how long each attempt to transfer
files lasts.

Download Properties tab


The Download Properties tab of the Properties dialog shows
downloading settings for GPS receivers.
Data Transfer

96 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Table 15.8 shows the contents of the Download Properties tab.


Table 15.8 Download Properties tab contents

Option Description
Concatenate Files on If logging is interrupted, files stored in a receiver
Download can have the same name. The receiver closes the
original file when logging stops (for example,
because of a power failure), then opens a new file
of the same name when logging resumes. If you
select this check box, the Data Transfer utility joins
files of the same name together when it transfers
them from the receiver. If this check box is cleared,
files are not concatenated when they are
transferred to your office computer.
Warnings Use this group to specify when to display a warning
message.

Select ... to ...

Always display the warning message for each file you


transfer.

Data Transfer
Once display the warning message for the first file
you transfer only.

Never suppress the warning message.

Progress dialogs
Progress dialogs appear when you begin transferring files.
If you are transferring files from your PC to a device, first the
Converting dialog appears, then the Sending dialog.
If you are transferring files from a device to your PC, first the
Receiving dialog appears, then the Converting dialog.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 97


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Converting dialog
Before transferring files to or from a device, the Converting dialog
appears while files are being converted to the required file format.
Conversion is always performed on the computer, not the device.

Table 15.9 shows the contents of the Converting dialog.


Table 15.9 Converting dialog contents
Data Transfer

Option Description
Status icon This animated icon shows that conversion is in
progress.
Progress indicator Shows the progress of the conversion of the current
file.
File name Shows the name of the file being converted.
Cancel Click Cancel to stop converting files. Any further
conversion or transfer is stopped but files that have
already been converted or transferred are not
deleted or converted back to their old format.

98 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Receiving dialog
The Receiving dialog appears when you begin transferring files from a
device. This dialog shows the progress of the transfer operation. Once
files have been received, the Converting dialog appears while they are
being converted.
Table 15.10 shows the contents of the Receiving dialog.
Table 15.10 Receiving dialog contents

Option Description
Status icon This animated icon shows the computer on the right
and the selected device on the left, with files
moving from the device to the computer to indicate
that the transfer is in progress.
Progress indicator



 
 
 



File name Shows the name of the file being transferred.
Records transferred Shows the number of records from the current file

Data Transfer
that have been transferred.
Cancel Click Cancel to stop transferring files. Any further
transferring is stopped but files that have already
been transferred are not deleted from the
destination.

Sending dialog
The Sending dialog appears when you begin transferring files to a
device. This dialog shows the progress of the transfer operation.
Before files are sent, the Converting dialog may appear while they are
being converted into the required format.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 99


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Table 15.11 shows the contents of the Sending dialog.


Table 15.11 Sending dialog contents

Option Description
Status icon This animated icon shows the computer on the left
and the selected device on the right, with files
moving from the computer to the device to indicate
that the transfer is in progress.
Progress indicator



 
 
 



File name Shows the name of the file being transferred.
Records transferred Shows the number of records from the current file
that have been transferred.
Cancel Click Cancel to stop transferring files. Any further
transferring is stopped but files that have already
been transferred are not deleted from the device.
Data Transfer

Associated Files dialog


When you send a configuration (.ccf) or coordinate system
export (.cse) file to a GIS device, you must also send any
associated files such as datum or projection files.

10 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

The Associated Files dialog appears only if there are files associated
with the file you are sending. Table 15.12 shows the contents of the
Associated Files dialog.
Table 15.12 Associated Files dialog contents

Option Description
List box The files associated with the .ccf or .cse file you
selected are listed here.

Coordinate System dialog


Use the Coordinate System dialog to select a coordinate system,
zone, and datum, or a site, to transfer to a GIS data collector.
This dialog is the same as the Coordinate System dialog in the
main GPS Pathfinder Office program. This dialog also appears
if you click Change in the Load Background Files dialog.
To display the Coordinate System dialog, select the Send tab in
the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Coordinate
System from the drop-down list.

Data Transfer
Note – Use this dialog to send a single coordinate system or site to a
CE device running the TerraSync software. This coordinate system
overwrites any existing coordinate systems in the TerraSync software.
If you want to use more than one coordinate system in the TerraSync
software, create a coordinate system export (.cse) file and select the
Coordinate System Export File option from Add.
For details on the fields in this dialog, see the Chapter 11, The
Coordinate System Manager.

Load Background Files dialog


Use the Load Background Files dialog to select the background
files you want to transfer to a data collector. This dialog is the
same as the Load Background Files dialog in the main GPS
Pathfinder Office program, with the addition of a Destination
field for selecting the location you want to transfer the files to.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 101


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

To display the Load Background Files dialog, select the Send


tab in the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select
Background from the drop-down list.
Table 15.13 shows the contents of the Load Background Files dialog.
Table 15.13 Load Background Files dialog contents

Option Description
File Names The File Names list displays the name and path of
background files. A check mark before a file
indicates the file will be added to the Files to Send
list in the Data Transfer dialog. Unchecked files will
not be added to the list and will not be transferred.
Add Click Add to add background files to the list. The
Add Background Files dialog appears. You can add
background files from different drives and folders by
selecting them in this dialog.
Add Web map Click Add web map to add background files from
an Internet map server (IMS) to the list. The
Internet Map wizard appears. Follow the
instructions to download maps from the IMS. For
more information, see Chapter 1, GPS Pathfinder
Data Transfer

Office Software.
Remove Click Remove to remove the currently highlighted
background file(s) from the list. The background file
itself is not deleted from the folder where it is
stored.
Destination Select the location on the data collector you want to
copy the files to.
Select ... to copy files to ...
Main Memory the main memory of the data collector
PC Card a PC card installed in the data collector If the
device is not a data collector or does not have a
PC card installed, the PC Card option is
unavailable and you can only select Main
Memory.

10 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Table 15.13 Load Background Files dialog contents

Option Description
Coordinate system of When you add a file to the list, the software
selected file(s) assumes that it is in the current coordinate system
(except for .ssf files, which are always in the
Lat/Long coordinate system). If the file is in a
different coordinate system, add it to the list, then
when you return to the Load Background Files
dialog, click Change and assign it the correct
coordinate system.
The lower panel of the dialog contains information
on the coordinate system assigned to the file(s)
highlighted in the list box.
Warning – If you want to load a raster background
file, it must match the current coordinate system.
Raster files cannot be transformed.
Change Click Change to open the Coordinate System
dialog, where you can assign a different coordinate
system to the file(s) highlighted in the list above.
Background files do not contain any information on
the coordinate system to which the positions in the
file are referenced.

Data Transfer
Note – Change does not alter coordinates; it
simply specifies the coordinate system so that
the software can interpret the coordinates
correctly.

Receive Almanac dialog


When you connect to a data collector and transfer data files, a
current almanac is automatically transferred from the data
collector to your office PC. You can also choose to transfer an
almanac file manually. You can transfer this file to the default
location, or to a different drive or folder.
To display the Receive Almanac dialog, select the Receive tab in
the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Almanac from
the drop-down list.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 103


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Table 15.14 shows the contents of the Receive Almanac dialog.


Table 15.14 Receive Almanac dialog contents

Option Description
Output File The filename and location the almanac file will be
transferred to appears in this field. By default this is
C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Trimble\Almanacs\Almanac.ssf. You can edit
the path or filename shown, or click Browse to
select a different location or filename.
Browse Click Browse to open the Save As dialog. Select a
folder and, if required, edit the filename in the File
Name field. Click Save to return to the Receive
Almanac dialog. The path and name of the selected
file are copied into the Output File field.

Waypoint Filter dialog (receive waypoints)


Use the Waypoint Filter dialog to select which waypoints you
want to transfer from a data collector.
Data Transfer

}To display the Waypoint Filter dialog, select the Receive tab in
the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Waypoint from
the drop-down list.

10 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Table 15.15 shows the contents of the Waypoint Filter dialog.


Table 15.15 Waypoint Filter dialog (receive waypoints) contents

Option Description

  
     

  
  
Select ... to ...

All send all waypoints in the selected file, or


receive all waypoints stored on the data
collector

Range send or receive a selection of waypoints

Start If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter


the number of the first waypoint in the range to
send or receive in this field.

End If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter


the number of the last waypoint in the range to
send or receive in this field.

Data Transfer
Output File Enter the full path and filename where you want to
store the transferred waypoints on your office
computer, or click Browse to browse for a folder.
Browse Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder
dialog. Select a folder and click OK to return to the
Waypoint Filter dialog. The path and name of the
selected folder are copied into the Output File field.
OK When you have selected the waypoints you want to
receive, click OK to close this dialog and return to
the Data Transfer dialog. The selected waypoint
range appears in the Files to Receive list.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 105


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview

Waypoint Filter dialog (send waypoints)


Use the Waypoint Filter dialog to select which waypoints you
want to transfer to a data collector.
To display the Waypoint Filter dialog, select the Send tab in the
Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Waypoint from the
drop-down list. The Open dialog appears. Select a waypoint file
from the Open dialog, and click Open.
Table 15.16 shows the contents of the Waypoint Filter dialog.
Table 15.16 Waypoint Filter dialog (send waypoints) contents

Option Description
Filter Use this group to select which waypoints to send.

Select ... to ...

All send all waypoints in the selected file

Range send a selection of waypoints form the file


Start If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter the
number of the first waypoint in the range to send in
Data Transfer

this field.
End If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter the
number of the last waypoint in the range to send in
this field.
Start position in Waypoints on GeoExplorer data collectors are
datalogger numbered sequentially. When you transfer
waypoints to a GeoExplorer data collector and do
not want to overwrite existing waypoints, you must
enter a starting number for the new waypoints that
is greater than the highest-numbered waypoint on
the data collector.

10 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15

Table 15.16 Waypoint Filter dialog (send waypoints) contents

Option Description
For example, if your data collector has 10 waypoints
stored, you must number transferred waypoints
from 11 or higher if you do not want to overwrite the
existing waypoints.
Enter a number in this field to set the starting
position.

Note – With an Asset Surveyor data collector,


or the TerraSync software, waypoints are
always appended.
OK When you have selected the waypoints you want to
send, click OK to close this dialog and return to the
Data Transfer dialog. The selected waypoint file
appears in the Files to Send list. If you have
selected a range of waypoints from the file, the
range is appended to the filename.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 107


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

15.3 Add Device wizard


The Add Device wizard guides you through the steps required to add a
new device definition for data transfer. Before adding a device
definition using the wizard, you need to physically connect the device
to the computer.
To start the Add Device wizard when the Data Transfer utility is
running in standalone mode, click Devices in the Data Transfer
dialog, then click New in the Devices dialog.
The steps in the Add Device wizard depend on the type of device you
select in the first step, and are described in the following sections.
If you have a survey-grade GPS receiver you can add a receiver
device:
• GPS receiver (4000 series)
If you have the GPS Pathfinder Office software installed you
can add a GIS device:
• GIS data collector
• GIS data collector on Windows CE device
Data Transfer

• GIS PC card
• GIS folder
• GIS E-mail device

15.3.1 Create New Device Step


The first step of the Add Device wizard is the Create New Device step.
This step lets you select the type of device you want to add to your list.
You need to select the option that matches the device you want to
connect to.
For example:
To connect to a GeoExplorer 3 data collector you must create a
GIS data collector device definition.

10 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.17 shows the contents of the Create New Device step:
Table 15.17 Create New Device contents

Option Description
List of device types The types of devices you can connect to are shown
in this list. Select the option that matches the type of
device you want to connect. The other steps in the
wizard depend on the device you selected.
OK Click OK to confirm the device type you have
selected.
The next step in the Add Device wizard depends on
the device type you select in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

Add New Device – GIS datalogger step


In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify which serial
port on your computer the datalogger (data collector) is connected to.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 109


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.18 shows the contents of the Add New Device – GIS
datalogger step.
Table 15.18 Add New Device – GIS datalogger contents

Option Description
Serial Port Select a serial (COM) port from this list to connect
to a data collector on that port.

Note – Once you have added a device, you


cannot change the serial port it connects to. If
you want to change the port a device connects
to, delete the existing device definition and
then create a new device definition that uses
the correct port.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of
device, click Cancel and start the Add Device
wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in
the wizard.
Data Transfer

Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device


definition and close the Add Device wizard. The
new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the
Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

11 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Add New Device step


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to give the new device a name
that will identify it in your list of devices:

Table 15.19 shows the contents of the Add New Device step.

Data Transfer
Table 15.19 Add New Device step contents

Option Description
Name Enter a name for the device in this field, or use the
default name that appears.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in
the wizard.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 111


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.19 Add New Device step contents

Option Description
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device
definition and close the Add Device wizard. The
new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the
Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

Add New Device – Folder step


In this step of the Add Device wizard you specify the folder on your
computer or network drive you want to set up as a device:
Data Transfer

11 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.20 shows the contents of the Add New Device – Folder step.
Table 15.20 Add New Device – Folder contents

Option Description
Folder Type the path and the folder name in this field, or
click Browse to search for a folder.

Note – You must select an existing folder


name.
Browse Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog.
Select a folder and click OK to return to the Add
New Device ñ Folder step. The path and name of
the selected folder appears in the Folder field.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of
device, click Cancel and start the Add Device
wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in
the wizard.

Data Transfer
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device
definition and close the Add Device wizard. The
new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the
Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 113


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Add New Device – PC Card step


When a PC card is inserted into the PCMCIA slot on your office
computer, it will function like a disk drive with its own drive letter. In
this step of the Add Device wizard you specify the drive letter for a PC
card:
Data Transfer

Table 15.21 shows the contents of the Add New Device – PC Card
step.
Table 15.21 Add New Device – PC Card step contents

Option Description
Drive Select the drive letter from this list that represents
the GIS PC card.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of
device, click Cancel and start the Add Device
wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in
the wizard.

11 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.21 Add New Device – PC Card step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device
definition and close the Add Device wizard. The
new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the
Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

Add New Device step (Select file type)


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify the type of GIS data
collector the PC card will be inserted into. The data collector type you
select controls the types of files you can transfer to or from the PC
card, and how files are converted.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 115


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.22 shows the contents of the Add New Device step.
Table 15.22 Add New Device step contents

Option Description
Type Select a data collector type from this field. The
options are:
• Asset Surveyor
• TerraSync
Version Select a version from this field if it is available. The
options available depend on the data collector you
selected from the Type field.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in
the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device
definition and close the Add Device wizard. The
new device appears in the list of devices.
Data Transfer

If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the


Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

11 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Add New Device step (select data collector type)


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify the type of GIS data
collector the selected folder represents. The data collector type you
select controls the types of files you can transfer to or from the folder,
and how files are converted:

Data Transfer
Table 15.23 shows the contents of the Add New Device step.
Table 15.23 Add New Device step (select data collector type) contents

Option Description
Type Select a data collector type from this field. The
options are:
• ASPEN
• Asset Surveyor
• TerraSync
• GeoExplorer 3
Version Select a version from this field if it is available. The
options available depend on the data collector you
selected from the Type field.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 117


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.23 Add New Device step (select data collector type) contents

Option Description
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in
the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device
definition and close the Add Device wizard. The
new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the
Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.
Data Transfer

11 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Create Remote Device step


In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify the port on
your office computer that the device is connected to:

Data Transfer
Table 15.24 shows the contents of the Create Remote Device step.
Table 15.24 Create Remote Device step contents

Option Description
Port Select a serial (COM) port from this list to connect
to a device on that port. If the device is a 5000
series GPS receiver, you can select USB from this
list instead to connect to a USB port.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of
device, click Cancel and start the Add Device
wizard again.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 119


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.24 Create Remote Device step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is
the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The
Add New Device step disappears and you are
returned to the dialog you started the wizard from.
The new device appears in the list of devices in that
window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this
step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.
Data Transfer

12 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Enter Device Name step


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to give the new device a name
that will make it easy to identify in your list of devices:

Data Transfer
Table 15.25 shows the contents of the Enter Device Name step.
Table 15.25 Enter Device Name step contents

Option Description
Name Enter a name for the device in this field.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is
the last step in the wizard.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 121


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.25 Enter Device Name step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The
Add New Device step disappears and you are
returned to the dialog you started the wizard from.
The new device appears in the list of devices in that
window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this
step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.
Data Transfer

12 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Serial Port Properties step


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to set the serial port properties
to allow your computer to communicate with the device:

Data Transfer
Table 15.26 shows the contents of the Serial Port Properties step.
Table 15.26 Serial Port Properties step contents

Option Description
Class This field shows the general type of the device you
are adding. This corresponds to the device type you
selected in the Create New Device step.
Type This field shows the specific type of device this new
device definition represents.
Port This field shows the port the device is connected to.
This is the port you selected in the Create Remote
Device step.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 123


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.26 Serial Port Properties step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Maximum baud rate If this list is available, select the highest baud rate
the Data Transfer utility will use when trying to
connect to the device. If this list is not available, the
device can only connect at one baud rate.
Use flow control Select this check box to enable flow control. When
flow control is in use, data is only transmitted to the
device when it signals that it is ready to receive
data.

Select ... to use ...

Hardware flow control commands generated by the device


(RTS/CTS)

Software flow control commands generated by the Data


(XON/XOFF) Transfer utility.
If this group is not available, flow control
cannot be used with this device.

Data bits Select the data bits option required from this
Data Transfer

list. The number of data bits required depends


on the device connected. If this list is
unavailable you cannot set the number of data
bits for this device type.
Parity Select the parity option required from this list. The
parity option required depends on the device
connected. If this list is unavailable you cannot set
the parity for this device type.
Stop bits Select the stop bits option required from this list.
The number of stop bits required depends on the
device connected. If this list is unavailable you
cannot set the number of stop bits for this device
type.
Max retries Enter a value in this field or cycle through the
values to specify the number of times the Data
Transfer utility tries to transfer files to or from this
device if the connection is lost during transfer.

12 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.26 Serial Port Properties step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Timeout (secs) Enter a value in this field or cycle through the
values to specify how long each attempt to transfer
files lasts.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is
the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The
Serial Port Properties step closes and you are
returned to the dialog you started the wizard from.
The new device appears in the list of devices in that
window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this
step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 125


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

USB Port Properties step


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to set the connection properties
to allow your computer to communicate with the GPS receiver:
Data Transfer

Table 15.27 shows the contents of the Serial Port Properties step.
Table 15.27 Serial Port Properties step contents

Option Description
Class This field shows the general type of the device you
are adding. This corresponds to the device type you
selected in the Create New Device step.
Type This field shows the specific type of device the new
device definition represents.
Port This field shows the port the device is connected to.
This is the port you selected in the Create Remote
Device step.

12 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.27 Serial Port Properties step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Max retries Enter a value in this field or cycle through the
values to specify the number of times the Data
Transfer utility tries to transfer files to or from this
device if the connection is lost during transfer.
Timeout (secs) Enter a value in this field or cycle through the
values to specify how long each attempt to transfer
files lasts.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is
the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The
Device Properties step closes and you are returned
to the dialog you started the wizard from. The new
device appears in the list of devices in that window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this
step.

Data Transfer
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 127


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Download Properties step


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify settings for
importing files from a receiver:
Data Transfer

12 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.28 shows the contents of the Download Properties step.


Table 15.28 Download Properties step contents

Option Description
Concatenate Files on Files stored in a receiver can have the same name if
Download logging is interrupted. The receiver closes the
original file when logging stops (because, for
example, of a power failure), then opens a new file
of the same name when logging resumes. If you
select this check box, the Data Transfer utility joins
files of the same name together when it imports
them from the receiver. If this check box is cleared,
files are not concatenated when they are imported.
Warnings Use this group to specify when to display a warning
message.

Select ... to ...

Always display the warning message for each file you


import.

Once display the warning message for the first file

Data Transfer
you import only.

Never suppress the warning message.


Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next This button is unavailable. This is the final step in
the Add Device wizard.
Finish Click Finish to confirm the download properties
and end the Add Device wizard. The Download
Properties step disappears and you are returned to
the dialog you started the wizard from. The new
device appears in the list of devices in that window.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 129


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Conversion Properties step


Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify conversion settings
for file transfer:
Data Transfer

Table 15.29 shows the contents of the Conversion Properties step.


Table 15.29 Conversion Properties step contents

Option Description
Display summary on If you select this check box, the Data Transfer utility
completion displays a conversion summary when it has finished
transferring files. If this check box is cleared, no
summary appears.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.

13 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.29 Conversion Properties step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Finish Click Finish to confirm the conversion properties
and end the Add Device wizard. The Conversion
Properties step disappears and you are returned to
the dialog you started the wizard from. The new
device appears in the list of devices in that window.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

Adding a device definition for a 4000 series GPS receiver


1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GPS Receiver (4000 Series) from the list of device types
and click OK.
The Create Remote Device step appears.

Data Transfer
3. From the Port field, select the serial (COM) port the receiver
will connect to, then click Next.
The Enter Device Name step appears.
4. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device
definition, then click Next.
The Serial Port Properties step appears.
5. Set the baud rate, flow control, and connection properties for
this receiver, then click Next.
The Create Remote Device step appears.
6. Specify the file download settings for this receiver.
7. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned
to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device
definition is displayed in the list of devices.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 131


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Add New Device – E-Mail Device step


In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify which mail
account or network user profile to use:
Data Transfer

13 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.30 shows the contents of the Add New Device – E-Mail
Device step.
Table 15.30 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents

Option Description
Profile Name Select the name of the user profile that you want to
use to log in to the messaging application (Outlook,
Outlook Express, or Eudora). This profile is used to
send e-mails from this device definition in the Data
Transfer utility to a CE device running the TerraSync
software, and to receive e-mails from the CE device.

Note – Your user profile is not your e-mail


address.
Password Enter the password for the selected profile in this
field. If you do not enter a password, you will be
prompted to enter it every time you send or receive
files using this device definition. Including the
password makes the transfer faster and simpler, but
leaving the Password field blank is more secure.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of

Data Transfer
device, click Cancel and start the Add Device
wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
Finish This button is unavailable. You cannot finish the Add
Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 133


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Add New Device – E-Mail Device step (Specify outgoing


mail options)
In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify the options for
sending files with this device definition:
Data Transfer

13 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.31 shows the contents of the Add New Device – E-Mail
Device step.
Table 15.31 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents

Option Description
Subject Prefix In this field, enter the text you want to use as a
prefix to the subject line of all e-mails sent using
this device. The full subject line consists of the
prefix you define here, followed by the filename of
the file you sent, and its size in kilobytes.
Note – The default value for this field is “Trimble
File”. The text you specify in this field must match
the text specified in the TerraSync software in the
Receive via E-mail form. If you change this text
from the default value, you must change the text in
the TerraSync software accordingly, or the
TerraSync software will be unable to successfully
identify e-mails with attached Trimble data files.
Note – Even if you select multiple files to send,
each file is sent in a separate e-mail. If a file

Data Transfer
requires associated files to be sent, or when the
conversion process creates additional files, all
associated files are attached to the same e-mail as
the file you sent.
When you use a subject line prefix, the recipient of
the files can easily identify those e-mails that
contain data files from the GPS Pathfinder Office
software.
To In the To field, enter the e-mail address of the
recipient, or click To to open the address book from
your default e-mail editor, where you can select an
e-mail address.
If you specify a recipient, this device definition can
only be used to send files to that e-mail address. If
you leave the To field blank, you can send files to
any e-mail address, and you are prompted to enter
a recipient whenever you send files using this
device definition.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 135


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Table 15.31 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents (Continued)

Option Description
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
Finish This button is unavailable. You cannot finish the
Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

Add New Device – E-Mail Device step (Specify incoming


mail options)
In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify the options for
receiving files with this device definition:
Data Transfer

13 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.32 shows the contents of the Add New Device – E-Mail
Device step.
Table 15.32 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents

Option Description
Process only e-mails In this field, enter the text that will be used in the
with subjects subject line of all e-mails received using this device.
containing This text must match the text specified in the
TerraSync software in the Send via E-mail form.
When you use agreed subject line text, e-mails that
include this text in their subject line are recognized
by the device as containing files sent from the field.
If an e-mail does not include this text, the data files
attached to it are not included in the Open dialog
when you select files to receive.
Note – The default value for this field is "Trimble
File". The text you specify in this field must match
the text specified in the TerraSync software in the
Send via E-mail form. If you change this text from
the default value, you must change the text in the
TerraSync software accordingly, or the Data

Data Transfer
Transfer utility will be unable to successfully
identify e-mails with attached Trimble data files.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add
Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add
Device wizard.
Finish This button is unavailable. You cannot finish the
Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and
return to the dialog you opened the Add Device
wizard from.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 137


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

Adding a device definition for a GIS data collector


1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS Datalogger from the list of device types and click
OK.
The Add New Device – GIS Datalogger step appears.
3. From the Serial Port field, select the serial (COM) port the
receiver will connect to, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
4. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device
definition.
5. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned
to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device
definition is displayed in the list of devices.

Adding a device definition for a GIS data collector on


Windows CE
Data Transfer

1. Start the Add Device wizard.


The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS Datalogger on Windows-CE from the list of device
types and click OK.
The Add New Device step appears.
3. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device
definition.
4. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned
to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device
definition is displayed in the list of devices.

13 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Adding a device definition for a GIS PC card


1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS PC Card from the list of device types and click OK.
The Add New Device – PC Card step appears.
3. From the Drive field, select the drive the PC card is connected
as, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
4. From the Type field, select the type of files you will send to this
device, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
5. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device
definition.
6. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned
to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device
definition is displayed in the list of devices.

Data Transfer
Adding a device definition for a GIS folder
1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS Folder from the list of device types and click OK.
The Add New Device – Folder step appears.
3. Select the folder to connect to. Do one of the following:
– Type a drive and path in the Folder field.
– Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog, select
a drive and folder, and click OK.
4. Click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 139


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

5. From the Type field, select the type of files you will send to this
device, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
6. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device
definition.
7. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned
to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device
definition is displayed in the list of devices.

Adding a device definition for a GIS E-mail device


1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS E-Mail Device from the list of device types and click
OK.
The Add New Device – E-Mail Device step appears.
3. From the Profile Name field, select a username, or enter your
username.
Data Transfer

4. In the Password field, enter the password for the selected


username, or leave this field blank to be prompted for the
password each time you send files using this device definition.
5. Click Next.
The Add New Device – E-Mail Device step appears.
6. In the Subject Prefix field, enter the text that you want to include
in the Subject field of each e-mail.
The subject line of each e-mail consists of this prefix, the
filename, and the file size.
7. Specify a recipient for the e-mail. Do one of the following:
– In the To field, enter the e-mail address that you want to
send the files to.

14 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

– Click To and select a recipient from your e-mail editor's


address book.
– Leave this field blank to be prompted for a recipient each
time you send an e-mail.
8. Click Next.
The Add New Device – E-Mail Device step appears.
9. In the Process only e-mails with subjects containing field, enter
the subject line text that the remote device will use to identify e-
mails with Trimble data files attached.
10. Click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
11. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device
definition.
12. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned
to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device
definition is displayed in the list of devices.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 141


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard

15.3.2 Types of Devices


To connect to a device with the GPS Pathfinder Office software, you
must create a device definition using the correct device type, as shown
in Table 15.33. For information about each device, the file types you
can transfer to or from it, and its connection details, click on its name
or icon.
Table 15.33 Types of devices

If you want to connect to a .. select this device type


GeoExplorer 3 GIS datalogger

GeoExplorer II GIS datalogger

GeoExplorer GIS datalogger

CE device running the TerraSync software GIS datalogger on


Windows CE
TSC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
Data Transfer

TDC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger

TDC2 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger

MC-V running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger

PC card from a GIS data collector GIS PC card

Folder on your computer or network GIS folder

E-mail account E-mail device

Field computer running the ASPEN software GIS datalogger

14 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15

Table 15.33 Types of devices (Continued)

If you want to connect to a .. select this device type


Pathfinder Basic GIS datalogger

4600LS receiver GPS receiver

4700 receiver GPS receiver

4800 receiver GPS receiver

Series 4000 receiver GPS receiver

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 143


15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Data Transfer

14 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

16
16 Data Collectors
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Asset Surveyor software
■ MC-V data collector
■ TSC1 data collector
■ TDC1 data collector
■ TDC2 data collector
■ GeoExplorer 3 handheld data collector
■ GeoExplorer II data collector
■ GeoExplorer data collector
■ GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector
16 Data Collectors

16.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to configure the following data collectors to
communicate with your office equipment:
• data collectors running the Asset Surveyor software
• the GeoExplorer series of data collectors
• the GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector
Data Transfer

14 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.2 Asset Surveyor Software


The Asset Surveyor software runs on the following data collectors:
• TSC1
• TDC1
• TDC2
• MC-V
Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a data collector
running Asset Surveyor. The following sections explain what to do.

16.2.1 Preparing a Data Collector Running Asset Surveyor


Software for Data Transfer
In order to communicate with the office computer, the data collector
must be in File Transfer mode.
To prepare a data collector running Asset Surveyor for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.

Data Transfer
2. Turn on the data collector and from the main menu select File
Manager.
3. From the File Manager menu select File Transfer.
The Asset Surveyor software displays the File Transfer status
form:

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 147


16 Data Collectors

Throughout the file transfer session, the Asset Surveyor


software will display status information on the second line of
this form.
4.
computer is complete, press =
(TDC1) or =
When data transfer between the data collector and the office
(TSC1, TDC2,
and MC-V) on the data collector to exit File Transfer mode.

16.2.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Data Collector


Running the Asset Surveyor Software
Table 16.1 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.1 File types you can transfer to or from a data collector running the Asset
Surveyor software

File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to


Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Background .ssf, .cor, .phs
Data Transfer

version 5 or later
Coordinate system .cse
version 4 or later
Data .ssf
version 5 or later
Data dictionary .ddf
Geoid grid .ggf, .dgf, .pgf, .mrp
version 4 or later
Other files .*
Waypoint .wpt

14 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.3 MC-V Data Collector


The MC-V runs the Asset Surveyor software. It connects as a GIS data
collector device.

16.3.1 Connecting an MC-V Data Collector to Your Computer


An MC-V is connected to the office computer using a null modem
cable.
To connect an MC-V to the office computer:
1. Connect one of the DE-9 (female) ends of the null modem cable
(part number 18532) to COM1 on the MC-V.
2. Connect the other DE-9 (female) end of the cable to a serial port
on the office computer.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 149


16 Data Collectors

If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin


serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.
Data Transfer

Figure 16.1 Direct connection between MC-V and the office


computer

15 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.4 TSC1 Data Collector


The TSC1 data collector runs the Asset Surveyor software. To connect
to a TSC1 running Asset Surveyor, choose the GIS data collector
device type.

16.4.1 Connecting a TSC1 Data Collector to Your Computer


A TSC1 can be connected to the office computer using either the GPS
Pathfinder Office Support Module (OSM) or a cable for a direct
connection.
The OSM setup for transferring data to the TSC1 data collector
provides external power. Using it lengthens the life of the internal
batteries in the data collector.
The direct connection setup for connecting a TSC1 data collector to
the office computer uses the internal batteries in the data collector to
power the transfer process. Do not use this method if the batteries are
low.
To connect a TSC1 to the office computer using the OSM:

Data Transfer
1. Connect one end of the OSM-to-PC data cable (part number
14284) to the OSM port labeled Data I/O. Connect the other end
to a COM port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin
serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.
2. Connect the OSM cable to the Hirose to DB9 adaptor cable
(P/N 34326). Attach this to the TSC1 download cable (P/N
32287). This cable connects to either the top or bottom port of
the TSC1.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 151


16 Data Collectors

3. Plug the OSM AC power cord into an AC outlet.


Data Transfer

Figure 16.2 Connecting a TSC1 to the office computer using the


OSM

To connect a TSC1 directly to the office computer:


1. Connect one end of the TSC1 data/power cable (P/N 30231-00)
to the null modem cable (P/N 18352).
2. Connect the null modem cable to the office computer COM
port.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin
serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.

15 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

Figure 16.3 Direct connection between the TSC1 and the office
computer

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 153


16 Data Collectors

16.5 TDC1 Data Collector


The TDC1 data collector runs the Asset Surveyor software. To connect
to a TDC1 running Asset Surveyor, choose the GIS data collector
device type.

16.5.1 Connecting a TDC1 Data Collector to Your Computer


A TDC1 can be connected to the office computer using either the GPS
Pathfinder Office Support Module (OSM-PF) or a cable for a direct
connection.
The OSM-PF setup for transferring data to the TDC1 data collector
provides external power. Using it lengthens the life of the internal
batteries in the data collector.
The direct connection setup for connecting a TDC1 data collector to
the office computer uses the internal batteries in the data collector to
power the transfer process. Do not use this method if the batteries are
low.
To connect a TDC1 to the office computer using the OSM-PF:
Data Transfer

1. Connect one end of the OSM-PF-to-PC data cable (part number


14284) to the OSM-PF port labeled Data I/O. Connect the other
end to a serial port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin
serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.
2. Connect the TDC1 data collector directly to the 12-pin Hirose
connector on the cable from the OSM-PF.

15 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

3. Plug the OSM-PF AC power cord into an AC outlet.

Data Transfer
Figure 16.4 Connecting a TDC1 to the office computer using the
OSM-PF

To connect a TDC1 directly to the office computer:


1. Connect the 12-pin Hirose connector end of the TDC1-to-PC
data cable (part number 20887) to the TDC1.
2. Connect the DE-9 (female) end of the cable to the office
computer.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 155


16 Data Collectors

If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin


serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.

Figure 16.5 Direct connection between the TDC1 and the office
computer
Data Transfer

15 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.6 TDC2 Data Collector


The TDC2 data collector runs the Asset Surveyor software. To connect
to a TDC2 running Asset Surveyor, choose the GIS data collector
device type.

16.6.1 Connecting a TDC2 Data Collector to Your Computer


A TDC2 can be connected to the office computer using either the GPS
Pathfinder Office Support Module (OSM-PF) or a cable for a direct
connection.
The OSM-PF setup for transferring data to the TDC2 data collector
provides external power. Using it lengthens the life of the internal
batteries in the data collector.
The direct connection setup for connecting a TDC2 data collector to
the office computer uses the internal batteries in the data collector to
power the transfer process. Do not use this method if the batteries are
low.
To connect a TDC2 to the office computer using the OSM-PF:

Data Transfer
1. Connect one end of the OSM-PF-to-PC data cable (part number
14284) to the OSM-PF port labeled Data I/O. Connect the other
end to a serial port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin
serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.
2. Connect the TDC2 data collector to the Fischer-to-12-pin
Hirose adaptor (part number 27996), and connect this adaptor to
the Hirose connector on the cable from the OSM-PF.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 157


16 Data Collectors

3. Plug the OSM-PF AC power cord into an AC outlet.


Data Transfer

Figure 16.6 Connecting a TDC2 to the office computer using the


OSM-PF

To connect a TDC2 directly to the office computer:


1. Connect the Fischer end of the TDC2-to-PC data cable (part
number 27997) to the TDC2.
2. Connect the DE-9 (female) end of the cable to the office
computer.

15 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin


serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.

Figure 16.7 Direct connection between the TDC2 and the office

Data Transfer
computer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 159


16 Data Collectors

16.7 GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector


Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GeoExplorer 3
data collector.

16.7.1 Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector

almanac file by pressing the s


You can tell if your GeoExplorer 3 data collector has received an
button then selecting the GPS tab. The
date of the almanac file displays at the bottom of the screen. If the
GeoExplorer 3 data collector does not have an almanac file the text
Almanac N/A appears.
The simplest way to get a current almanac file is to take your
GeoExplorer 3 data collector outside and allow it to calculate
positions. It will automatically acquire a new almanac file in about 15
minutes.

16.7.2 Connecting a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector to Your


Computer
Data Transfer

The GeoExplorer 3 data collector connects to the computer using the


support module provided. Alternatively, use the serial clip provided to
connect the data collector to the PC.
The support module and serial clip perform the same function and
connect to the PC in the same way.
The support module is larger, requires a reasonably flat and stable
surface to rest on and is best suited for use in the office. The serial clip
does not need to rest on a surface, as it clips directly onto the back of
the data collector, so it is useful for connecting to a portable computer
in the field.

16 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

To connect a GeoExplorer 3 data collector to a computer via the


support module:
1. Connect one end of a standard null modem cable (part number
18532) to the back of the support module.
2. Connect the other end of the null modem cable to a serial port
on the computer.
If the computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial
port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the
computer end of the cable.
3. Place the data collector in the support module so that the screen
faces upwards and the data collector is resting in the support
module. Make sure the contact pins on the support module and
the contacts on the back of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector are
aligned and touching.
To connect a GeoExplorer 3 data collector to a computer via the serial
clip:
1. Connect the serial clip to one end of a null modem data cable
(part number 18532).

Data Transfer
2. Connect the other end of the null modem cable to a serial port
on the computer.
If the computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial
port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the
computer end of the cable.
3. Attach the serial clip to the back of the data collector so that the
serial clip locks into place. Make sure the contact pins on the
serial clip and the contacts on the back of the data collector are
aligned and touching.
Once the GeoExplorer 3 data collector and the computer are
connected, you may need to configure the data collector to transfer
data. By default, the GeoExplorer 3 data collector is set to enable data
transfer through the support module.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 161


16 Data Collectors

If you have changed any communication settings from the defaults, or


want to use the serial clip, you must change the communication
configuration before you can transfer data.

16.7.3 Preparing a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector for Data Transfer


The GeoExplorer 3 data collector can communicate with a computer
through either the support module or the serial clip. To transfer data,
the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer 3 must be set to the
correct mode for the accessory used.
By default, the GeoExplorer 3 data collector is set to enable data
transfer through the support module.
To prepare a GeoExplorer 3 data collector for data transfer via the
support module:
1. Connect the data collector to the computer with the support
module.
2. Make sure that the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer

do this, press thes


3 data collector is set to transfer data via the support module. To
button then select the Setup tab. Select
Data Transfer

Configurations / COMMS and set the Data transfer field to


Support module.
To prepare a GeoExplorer 3 data collector for data transfer via the
serial clip:
1. Connect the data collector to the computer with the serial clip.
2. Make sure that the communication protocol of the

clip. To do this, press thes


GeoExplorer 3 data collector is set to transfer data via the serial
button then select the Setup tab.
Select Configurations / COMMS and set the Data transfer field
to Serial clip.

16 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.7.4 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer 3


Data Collector
Table 16.2 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.2 File types you can transfer to or from a GeoExplorer 3 data collector

File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to


Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Configuration .ccf
Coordinate system .cse except
GeoExplorer 3c
Data .ssf except
GeoExplorer 3c
Data dictionary .ddf
Geoid grid .ggf, .dgf, .pgf, .mrp except
GeoExplorer 3c
/DQJXDJH OQJ

Data Transfer
Waypoint .wpt

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 163


16 Data Collectors

16.8 GeoExplorer II Data Collector


Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GeoExplorer II
data collector.

16.8.1 Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer II Data Collector


You can tell if your GeoExplorer II data collector has received a
complete almanac file by switching it off. As the screen is counting
down the time to shut down, the letter a is displayed at the bottom of
the screen. An upper case A indicates that a complete almanac file was
recorded; a lower case a indicates that a complete almanac file was not
recorded.
The simplest way to get a current almanac file is to take your data
collector outside and allow it to calculate positions. It will
automatically acquire a new almanac file in about 45 minutes.

16.8.2 Connecting a GeoExplorer II Data Collector to Your


Computer
Data Transfer

The GeoExplorer II data collector is connected to the office computer


using the data download cable that is supplied with the data collector.
To connect a GeoExplorer II data collector to the office computer:
1. Connect the small circular end of the data download cable to the
back of the data collector.
2. Connect the other end of the data download cable to a serial port
on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin
serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.

16 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.8.3 Preparing a GeoExplorer II Data Collector for Data Transfer


The GeoExplorer II data collector does not have to be in Data Transfer
mode in order to communicate with the office computer.
To prepare a GeoExplorer II data collector for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.
2. Turn on the data collector.
3. Make sure that the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer
II data collector is set to XMDM. To do this, from the main
menu select Configuration / Communication / Port A, and set
the following values:
Option Value
Protocol XMDM
Baud 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8

Data Transfer
Stop Bits 1
4. Alternatively, from the main menu select Data Transfer. The
GeoExplorer II data collector displays the file transfer status
form.
Throughout the file transfer session the data collector will
display status information on this form.
When data transfer between the data collector and the office computer
is complete, press [Esc] on the GeoExplorer II data collector to exit
Data Transfer mode.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 165


16 Data Collectors

16.8.4 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer II


Data Collector
Table 16.3 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.3 File types you can transfer to or from a GeoExplorer II data collector

File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to


Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Data .ssf
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt
Data Transfer

16 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.9 GeoExplorer Data Collector


Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GeoExplorer
data collector.

16.9.1 Receiving an Almanac with a GeoExplorer Data Collector


You can tell if your GeoExplorer data collector has received a
complete almanac file by switching it off. As the screen is counting
down the time to shut down, the letter a is displayed at the bottom of
the screen. An upper case A indicates that a complete almanac file was
recorded; a lower case a indicates that a complete almanac file was not
recorded.
The simplest way to get a current almanac file is to take your
data collector outside and allow it to calculate positions. It will
automatically acquire a new almanac file in about 45 minutes. You do
not need to instruct the GeoExplorer data collector to record an
almanac file.

Data Transfer
16.9.2 Connecting a GeoExplorer Data Collector to Your
Computer
The GeoExplorer data collector is connected to the office computer
using the data download cable that is supplied with the data collector.
To connect a GeoExplorer data collector to the office computer:
1. Connect the small circular end of the data download cable to the
back of the data collector.
2. Connect the other end of the data download cable to a serial port
on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin
serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 167


16 Data Collectors

16.9.3 Preparing a GeoExplorer Data Collector for Data Transfer


The GeoExplorer data collector does not have to be in Data Transfer
mode in order to communicate with the office computer but you can
enter this mode if you so choose.
To prepare a GeoExplorer data collector for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.
2. Turn on the data collector.
3. Make sure that the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer
data collector is set to XMDM. To do this, from the main menu
select Configuration / Communication / Port A, and set the
following values:
Option Value
Protocol XMDM
Baud 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Data Transfer

Stop Bits 1
4. Alternatively, from the main menu select Data Transfer. The
GeoExplorer data collector displays the file transfer status form.
Throughout the file transfer session the data collector will
display status information on this form.
When data transfer between the data collector and the office computer
is complete, press [Esc] on the GeoExplorer data collectors exit Data
Transfer mode.

16 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

16.9.4 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer Data


Collector
Table 16.4 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.4 File types you can transfer to or from a GeoExplorer data collector

File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to


Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Data .ssf
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 169


16 Data Collectors

16.10 GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector


Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GPS Pathfinder
Basic data collector.

16.10.1 Connecting a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector to Your


Computer
The GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector is connected to the office
computer using the data cable that is supplied with the data collector
system.
To connect a GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector to the office
computer:
1. Connect the round 7-pin end of the data cable to the data port on
the data collector.
2. Connect the data cable converter (part number 16637-00) to the
25-pin end of the data cable (part number 16844).
3. Connect the data cable and attached data cable converter to a
serial port on the office computer.
Data Transfer

If the office computer has a 9-pin serial port instead of a 25-pin


serial port, attach the gray 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number
16039) to other end of the data cable converter.

16.10.2 Preparing a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector for Data


Transfer
In order to communicate with the office computer, the GPS Pathfinder
Basic data collector must be set up for communication.
To prepare a GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.
2. Turn on the data collector.

17 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Data Collectors 16

3. Make sure the GPS Pathfinder Basic's communication protocol


is set to XMODM. To do this, turn the rotary knob to the Set Up
position and click the Inc/Dec switch up once to enter the
Comm screen. The screen should look as follows:

4. Make sure that the first two lines of the screen are as shown
above. If not, change them by using the L/R switch to move
over each field, and the Inc/Dec switch to change to the correct
value.

16.10.3 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GPS Pathfinder


Basic Data Collector
Table 16.5 shows the file types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.5 File types you can transfer to or from a GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector

Data Transfer
File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to
Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Waypoint .wpt

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 171


16 Data Collectors
Data Transfer

17 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

17
17 Software
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ ASPEN software
■ TerraSync software
17 Software

17.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to configure your field computer, running
either the ASPEN or TerraSync software, to communicate with your
office computer.
Data Transfer

17 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Software 17

17.2 ASPEN
The ASPEN software can be installed on a computer and taken into
the field.
Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a field computer
running ASPEN.

17.2.1 Connecting a Field Computer Running ASPEN to Your


Computer
A field computer can be connected to the office computer using a data
download cable.
To connect a field computer to the office computer:
1. Connect one end of the data download cable to the field
computer. Connect the other end to a serial port on the office
computer.
2. If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin
serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to
the office computer end of the cable.

Data Transfer

Figure 17.1 Connection between the field computer and the office
computer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 175


17 Software

17.2.2 Preparing a Field Computer Running ASPEN for Data


Transfer
In order to communicate with the office computer, the ASPEN
software must be in Data Transfer mode.
To prepare a field computer running ASPEN for data transfer:
1. Connect the field computer to the office computer.
2. Start the ASPEN software and select File / Data Transfer. The
Data Transfer dialog appears:
Data Transfer

The Data Directory field always defaults to the current project


directory in the ASPEN software. All other fields default to the
directory that was last used to access files of that type on the
field computer.
These directories must be set correctly as the Data Transfer
utility will always store files in the directory specified on the
field computer. Click Browse to change any directory.

17 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Software 17

3. Click OK. The Data Transfer Status dialog appears:

This dialog shows the status of communications between the


field and office computers.
The ASPEN software is now ready to send or receive files.
4. When data transfer between the ASPEN software and the office
computer is complete, click Close to exit the Data Transfer
Status dialog.

17.2.3 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Field Computer


Running ASPEN
Table 17.1 shows the data types that are available for transfer between

Data Transfer
a field computer running the ASPEN software and your office
computer.
Table 17.1 File types you can transfer to or from a field computer running ASPEN

File Type Extensions Transfer from ASPEN Transfer to ASPEN


Almanac .ssf
Background .dxf, .shp, .ssf, .cor,
.phs, .bmp, .tif, .fbk
Base data .ssf, .cor, .phs
Coordinate system .cse
version 2.08 or later
Data .ssf, .cor, .phs
Data dictionary .ddf

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 177


17 Software

Table 17.1 File types you can transfer to or from a field computer running ASPEN

File Type Extensions Transfer from ASPEN Transfer to ASPEN


Geoid grid .ggf, .dgf, .mrp, pgf
Other files .*
Waypoint .wpt
Data Transfer

17 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Software 17

17.3 TerraSync software


The TerraSync software runs under the Windows CE operating system
on the following CE devices:
• Palm PC (P/PC)
• Handheld PC (H/PC)
• Handheld PC Professional (H/PC Pro)

17.3.1 Connecting a CE Device To Your Computer


A CE device running the TerraSync software connects to your office
PC using Microsoft's ActiveSync software. This connection may be
via a serial cable, cradle, infrared, modem, or a network.
For help on connecting your CE device for data transfer, refer to the
ActiveSync help or your CE device's documentation.

17.3.2 Preparing a CE Device Running Terrasync for Data Transfer

Data Transfer
The Data Transfer utility transfers files directly to or from the memory
of the CE device. You do not need to prepare the TerraSync software
for data transfer. However, it is strongly recommended that you close
the TerraSync program and any other programs that are running before
you transfer files.
For help on preparing your CE device for data transfer, refer to the
ActiveSync help or the documentation for your CE device.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 179


17 Software

17.3.3 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a CE Device


Running the TerraSync Software
Table 17.2 shows the data types that are available for transfer between
a CE device running the TerraSync software and your office computer.
Table 17.2 File types you can transfer to or from a CE device running TerraSync

File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to


TerraSync TerraSync
Almanac .ssf
Background .ssf, .cor, .phs, .bmp
Coordinate systems .cse
Coordinate system export .cse
Data .ssf
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt
Data Transfer

18 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

18
18 GIS Devices and E-mail
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ GIS Folder
■ PC card from a GIS data collector
■ E-mail account
18 GIS Devices and E-mail

18.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to set up a computer folder as a data
transfer device, and how to transfer data by e-mail.
Data Transfer

18 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GIS Devices and E-mail 18

18.2 GIS Folder


You can set up any folder on your computer or network as a device in
the Data Transfer utility. When you connect to a folder in the Data
Transfer utility, the folder simulates the type of device it is associated
with.
You can set up a folder to simulate the following data collectors or
software:
• ASPEN
• Asset Surveyor version 4.x
• Asset Surveyor version 5.x
• TerraSync version 1.x
• GeoExplorer version 3.x
When you use a GIS folder as a device you can perform file
conversions without copying files to or from a GIS data collector.
You do not have to prepare a folder for transfer, but you must ensure
that you have read and write access to the folder.

Data Transfer
Use the GIS folder device type to connect to a folder on your computer
or network.
• Adding a device definition for a GIS folder
• File types you can transfer to or from a GIS folder

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 183


18 GIS Devices and E-mail

18.2.1 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS Folder


Table 18.1 shows the file types you can transfer depend on the data
collector type you assign to the folder when you create its device
definition. You can check or change the data collector type of a folder
device in the Properties dialog.
Table 18.1 File types you can transfer to or from a GIS folder

Folder Type Can transfer the same file as


ASPEN ASPEN
Asset Surveyor 4.x or 5.x Asset Surveyor software
TerraSync v1.x TerraSync software
GeoExplorer 3 GeoExplorer 3 handheld
Data Transfer

18 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GIS Devices and E-mail 18

18.3 PC Card from a GIS Data Collector


Once you have connected a PC card to your computer, it functions like
a disk drive and does not have to be prepared for data transfer.
Use the GIS PC card device type to connect to a PC card from a GIS
data collector.
• Adding a device definition for a GIS PC card
• Connecting a PC card to your computer
• File types you can transfer to or from a GIS PC card

18.3.1 Connecting a PC Card To Your Computer


For help on connecting a PC card device your computer, consult the
documentation for the PCMCIA card.

18.3.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS PC Card


The file types you can transfer depend on the data collector type you

Data Transfer
assign to the PC card when you create its device definition. You can
check or change the data collector type of a PC card device in the
Properties dialog.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 185


18 GIS Devices and E-mail

18.4 E-Mail Account


The TerraSync software can send and receive files by e-mail. This
function lets you transfer files between the office and the field without
the need to return to the office and connect the CE device to the office
computer. To send and receive files by e-mail in the Data Transfer
utility, you need to set up an E-mail device definition.
To define an E-mail device, you need to have an Internet connection
and a user profile set up in one of the following MAPI-compliant e-
mail applications:
• Microsoft Outlook
• Microsoft Outlook Express
• QUALCOMM Eudora
Note – Before you define an E-mail device, make sure that the e-mail
application and any Internet software it requires are installed on your
office computer, and that your user profile is configured correctly. The
CE device(s) running the TerraSync software that you want to transfer
files to or from should also be configured to send and receive e-mail
using or an MAPI-compliant e-mail program, such as Microsoft
Data Transfer

Pocket Outlook, which is supplied with the Windows CE operating


system.
The Data Transfer utility does not install or set up your Internet
connection. It simply uses the Internet facilities built into Windows or
Windows CE. It is your responsibility to set up Windows for your
Internet connection.
Trimble is not responsible for setting up your Internet connection, or
for solving any Internet problems that may occur.
For questions or support concerning your Internet connection, please
contact your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP).

18 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GIS Devices and E-mail 18

The process of transferring files between the Data Transfer utility and
a CE device running the TerraSync software is as follows:

Data Transfer
1. Send a File from the Data Transfer utility.
2. To send a file, select the file in the Data Transfer utility as usual.
When you click Transfer All, the Data Transfer utility logs in to
your e-mail application, using the user profile you have
selected, creates an e-mail with the selected file as an
attachment, and places the e-mail in the Outbox. The next time
the Outbox is checked for outgoing messages, the e-mail is sent
to the address that you specified in the E-mail device definition.
If you did not specify a recipient in the E-mail device definition,
you are prompted to enter an e-mail address when you send the
file in the Data Transfer utility.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 187


18 GIS Devices and E-mail

3. Receive the File on the CE Device.


The TerraSync software checks the subject line of any new e-
mails in Inbox on the CE device. If the subject line includes the
agreed prefix, the e-mail is identified by the software as
containing Trimble data files. When the user in the field uses the
Receive via E-mail option in TerraSync's File Manager screen,
all data files attached to e-mails with the required subject line
are listed. The user can then select any file and transfer it to the
appropriate folder on the CE device, ready for use in the
TerraSync software.
4. Send a File from the CE Device.
The user in the field uses the Send via E-mail option in
TerraSync's File Manager screen to select a file to send to the
office computer. When they send the file, the TerraSync
software logs in to the e-mail program, creates an e-mail with
the selected file as an attachment, and places the e-mail in the
Outbox.
The next time the Outbox is checked for outgoing messages, the
e-mail is sent to the address that was specified in the TerraSync
Data Transfer

software.
5. Receive the File in the Data Transfer Utility.
The Data Transfer utility checks the subject line of any new e-
mails in your e-mail application's Inbox. If the subject line
includes the agreed prefix, the e-mail is identified by the
software as containing Trimble data files. When you connect to
the E-mail device and select files to receive, all data files
attached to e-mails with the required subject line are listed. You
can select any data file as usual and transfer it to your office
computer by clicking Transfer All.

B Tip – You can use the Batch Processor utility to automatically detect when
e-mails are received from a CE device running the TerraSync software
and transfer the attached files to your office computer.

18 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GIS Devices and E-mail 18

Use the GIS E-mail device type to connect to an e-mail account.


• Adding a device definition for an e-mail account
• File types you can transfer to or from an e-mail account

18.4.1 File Types You Can Transfer To or From an E-Mail Account


Table 18.2 shows the file types that are available for transfer between
an e-mail account and your office computer.
Table 18.2 File types you can transfer to or from an e-mail account

File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to


e-mail account e-mail account
Background .dxf, .ssf, .cor, .bmp,
.jpg
Data .ssf, .cor, .imp, .phs
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 189


18 GIS Devices and E-mail
Data Transfer

19 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

19
19 GPS Receivers
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ 4600LS receiver
■ Series 4000 receiver
■ 4700 receiver
■ 4800 receiver
■ 4400 receiver
19 GPS Receivers

19.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to configure survey-grade GPS receivers to
communicate with your office computer, and how to use the Data
Transfer utility with these receivers.
Data Transfer

19 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Receivers 19

19.2 4600LS Receiver


The 4600LS is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise
surveying, positioning, and navigation.
It also has the ability to act as a standalone base station for Pathfinder
GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a
4600LS receiver.

19.2.1 Preparing a 4600LS Receiver for Data Transfer


Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set
it up correctly.
To prepare a 4600LS receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4600LS receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.

Data Transfer
19.2.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4600 Receiver
Table 19.1 shows the file types that are available for transfer between
the 4600LS receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.1 File types you can transfer to or from a 4600 receiver

Transfer from Transfer to


File Type Extensions 4600LS 4600LS
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 193


19 GPS Receivers

19.3 Series 4000 Receiver


The Series 4000 is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise
surveying, positioning, and navigation. It also has the ability to act as a
standalone base station for Pathfinder GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a Series
4000 receiver.

19.3.1 Preparing a Series 4000 Receiver for Data Transfer


Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set
it up correctly.
To prepare a Series 4000 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the Series 4000 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.

19.3.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Series 4000


Receiver
Data Transfer

Table 19.2 shows the file types that are available for transfer between
the Series 4000 receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.2 File types you can transfer to or from a Series 4000 receiver

Transfer from Transfer to


File Type Extensions Series 4000 Series 4000
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat
Station/session table .tab

19 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Receivers 19

19.4 4700 Receiver


The 4700 receiver is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise
surveying, positioning, and navigation. It also has the ability to act as a
standalone base station for Pathfinder GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a 4700
receiver.

19.4.1 Preparing a 4700 Receiver for Data Transfer


Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set
it up correctly.
To prepare a 4700 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4700 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.

19.4.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4700 Receiver

Data Transfer
Table 19.3 shows the file types that are available for transfer between
the 4700 receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.3 File types you can transfer to or from a 4700 receiver

Transfer from Transfer to


File Type Extensions 4700 Receiver 4700 Receiver
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 195


19 GPS Receivers

19.5 4800 Receiver


The 4800 receiver is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise
surveying, positioning, and navigation. It also has the ability to act as a
standalone base station for Pathfinder GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a 4800
receiver.

19.5.1 Preparing a 4800 Receiver for Data Transfer


Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set
it up correctly.
To prepare a 4800 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4800 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.

19.5.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4800 Receiver


Table 19.4 shows the file types that are available for transfer between
Data Transfer

the 4800 receiver and your office computer.


Table 19.4 File types you can transfer to or from a 4800 receiver

Transfer from Transfer to


File Type Extensions 4800 Receiver 4800 Receiver
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat

19 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Receivers 19

19.6 4400 Receiver


The 4400 receiver is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise
surveying, positioning, and navigation.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a 4400
receiver.

19.6.1 Preparing a 4400 Receiver for Data Transfer


Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set
it up correctly.
To prepare a 4400 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4400 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.

19.6.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4400 Receiver


Table 19.5 shows the file types that are available for transfer between

Data Transfer
the 4400 receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.5 File types you can transfer to or from a 4400 receiver

Transfer from Transfer to


File Type Extensions 4400 4400
Ephemeris .eph

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 197


19 GPS Receivers
Data Transfer

19 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

20
20 Types of Files
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Almanac files
■ Background files
■ Base data files
■ Configuration (.ccf) files
■ Coordinate System (.cse, .dat) export files
■ Coordinate Systems
■ Data Dictionary (.ddf) files
■ Ephemeris (.eph) files
■ Geoid grid files
■ GIS data files
■ Help (.hlp) files
■ Language (.lng) files
■ Other files
■ Raw observations (.dat files)
■ Station/session tables (.tab files)
■ Waypoint (.wpt) files
20 Types of Files

20.1 Introduction
The types of files you can transfer to or from GIS devices are listed
below.
• Almanac files
• Background files
• Base data files
• Configuration files (.ccf) files
• Coordinate systems
• Coordinate system export (.cse) files
• Data dictionary (.ddf) files
• Ephemeris (.eph) files
• Geoid grid files
• GIS data files
• Help (.hlp) files
• Language (.lng) files
Data Transfer

• Other files
• Raw observations (.dat files)
• Station/session tables (.tab files)
• Waypoint (.wpt) files

20 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.2 Almanac Files


An almanac file contains time and position information for GPS
satellites. A current almanac can be used to plan future data collection
sessions, using the Quick Plan utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office
software.

20.2.1 Devices You Can Transfer Almanac Files From


Table 20.1 shows the devices that you can transfer almanac files from.
Table 20.1 Devices you can transfer almanac files from

Transfer almanac Transfer almanac


Device Filename files from files to
CE device running the *.ssf
TerraSync software
Field computer running the *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
ASPEN software
Data Collector running the *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
Asset Surveyor software

Data Transfer
GeoExplorer 3 *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GeoExplorer II *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GeoExplorer *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
Pathfinder Basic *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 201


20 Types of Files

20.3 Background Files


A background file may be a file of GIS data, for example features
collected in the same area in a previous session, a file of information
from a GIS database, or an image file.

20.3.1 Devices You Can Transfer Background Files To or From


Table 20.2 shows the devices that you can transfer background files to
or from.
Table 20.2 Devices you can transfer background files to or from

Transfer Transfer
background files background files
Device Filename from to
CE device running the *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
TerraSync software *.phs, *.bmp, *.jpg
Field computer running the *.dxf, *.shp, *.ssf,
ASPEN software *.cor, *.imp, *.phs,
*.bmp, *.tif, *.fbk
Data Transfer

Data Collector running the *.ssf


Asset Surveyor software
E-mail account *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.bmp
GeoExplorer II *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GeoExplorer *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
Pathfinder Basic *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt

To transfer a background file from a data collector running the Asset


Surveyor software to your PC, transfer it as a normal data (.ssf) file.

20 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.4 Base Data Files


A base station records GPS positions at a stationary location. The base
data recorded at a base station is used to increase the accuracy of data
recorded by roving receivers.

20.4.1 Devices You Can Transfer Base Data Files To or From


Table 20.3 shows the devices that you can transfer base data files to or
from.
Table 20.3 Devices you can transfer base data files to or from

Transfer base Transfer base


Device Filename data files from data files to
Field computer running the *.ssf
ASPEN software
Data Collector running Asset *.ssf
Surveyor version 5 or later
GeoExplorer 3 *.ssf

Data Transfer
GeoExplorer II *.ssf
GeoExplorer *.ssf

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 203


20 Types of Files

20.5 Configuration (.ccf) Files


You can use the Configuration Manager utility in the GPS Pathfinder
Office software to create configuration files for GeoExplorer 3 data
collector. The configuration of GeoExplorer 3 handheld determines
how data is collected, entered, displayed, and communicated with
external devices. A configuration file determines default settings to
control these parameters and can be used to lock some settings.
For more information on defining configuration files see the
Configuration Manager Help.

20.5.1 Devices You Can Transfer Configuration Files To


Table 20.4 shows the devices that you can transfer configuration files
to.
Table 20.4 Devices you can transfer configuration files to

Transfer Transfer
Device Filename configuration configuration
files from files to
Data Transfer

GeoExplorer 3 *.ccf

20 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.6 Coordinate System (.cse, .dat) Export Files


To send a coordinate system, or a set of coordinate systems, to a data
collector, you must first generate a .cse file in the Coordinate System
Manager. For more information see the Coordinate System Manager
Help.
If the .cse file selected for transfer references any additional file (such
as a datum or projection file) the Associated Files dialog will appear
when Transfer All is clicked. This dialog gives you the option of not
sending any large files which may not be necessary on the data
collector.

B Tip – You can also send a single coordinate system to a CE device


running the TerraSync software. The coordinate system you send
overwrites all existing coordinate systems in the TerraSync software. It is
strongly recommended that you send a coordinate system export file
instead of a coordinate system.

Note – Instead of .cse files, the TerraSync software uses coordinate


system export files with a .csw extension. When you export a

Data Transfer
coordinate system from the Coordinate System Manager utility, both
the .cse and .csw files are exported. To transfer a coordinate system
export file to a CE device running the TerraSync software, simply
select the appropriate .cse file as usual. The corresponding .csw file is
sent to the CE device.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 205


20 Types of Files

20.6.1 Devices You Can Transfer Coordinate System Export Files


To or From
Table 20.5 shows the devices that you can transfer coordinate system
export files to or from.
Table 20.5 Devices you can transfer coordinate system export files to or from

Transfer Transfer
coordinate coordinate
system export system export
Device Filename files from files to
CE device running the 
TerraSync software
Field computer running ASPEN 
version 2.08 or later
TSC1 data collector running 
Asset Surveyor version 4 or
later
GeoExplorer 3 

TDC1, TDC2, or MC-V data 




Data Transfer

collector running the Asset


Surveyor software

20 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.7 Coordinate Systems


You can send a single coordinate system to a CE device running the
TerraSync software. You do not have to prepare a Coordinate System
Export (.cse) file. Instead you select the site, or coordinate system,
zone, and datum, at the time of transfer.

C Warning – When you transfer a single coordinate system, it overwrites


any coordinate systems already loaded in the TerraSync software. If you
want to use more than one coordinate system, create a .cse file
containing all the systems you will use and transfer the .cse file instead.

Devices you can transfer coordinate systems to or from


Table 20.6 shows the devices that you can transfer coordinate systems
to or from.
Table 20.6 Devices you can transfer coordinate systems to or from

Transfer Transfer
coordinate coordinate

Data Transfer
Device Filename systems from systems to
CE device running the *.cse
TerraSync software

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 207


20 Types of Files

20.8 Data Dictionary (.ddf) Files


A data dictionary describes the features and attributes relevant to a
particular project or job. It is used in the field to control the collection
of features (objects) and attributes (information about those objects).
Use the Data Dictionary Editor utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office
software to create and edit .ddf files.
Note – You can only store one data dictionary on a GeoExplorer or
GeoExplorer II data collector. When you transfer a new data
dictionary it automatically overwrites the existing data dictionary,
provided there are no data files on the data collector that use the
existing data dictionary. Before transferring a new data dictionary to
a GeoExplorer or GeoExplorer II, delete all rover files on the data
collector, or transfer them to your PC.

20.8.1 Devices You Can Transfer Data Dictionary Files To or From


Table 20.7 shows the devices that you can transfer data dictionary files
to or from.
Data Transfer

Table 20.7 Devices you can transfer data dictionary files to or from

Transfer data Transfer data


dictionary files dictionary files
Device Filename from to
CE device running the *.ddf
TerraSync software
Field computer running the *.ddf
ASPEN software
GeoExplorer *.ddf
Data Collector running the *.ddf
Asset Surveyor software
GeoExplorer II *.ddf
GeoExplorer 3 *.ddf
E-mail account *.ddf

20 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.9 Ephemeris (.eph) Files


Ephemeris files contain information on the exact location and health
of GPS satellites. They can be transferred from GPS receivers.

20.9.1 Devices You Can Transfer Ephemeris Files To or From


Table 20.8 shows the devices that you can transfer ephemeris files to
or from.
Table 20.8 Devices you can transfer ephemeris files to or from

Transfer Transfer
ephemeris files ephemeris files
Device Filename from to
4600LS receiver 

4700 receiver 

4800 receiver 

Series 4000 receiver 

4400 receiver 

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 209


20 Types of Files

20.10 Geoid Grid Files


A geoid model is a mathematical definition of the difference between
WGS-84 Height and local height above mean sea level (MSL). It
defines the mean sea level over a local area. A geoid grid model is a
file that contains these differences for a number of positions on a grid.
Using interpolation, the difference between the WGS-84 Height and
local height above MSL can be calculated for any point that falls
within the extents of that grid.

20.10.1 Devices You Can Transfer Geoid Grid Files To


Table 20.9 shows the devices that you can transfer geoid grid files to.
Table 20.9 Devices you can transfer geoid grid files to

Transfer geoid Transfer geoid


Device Filename grid files from grid files to
Field computer running the  
 
ASPEN software  

Data Collector running Asset  


 
Data Transfer

Surveyor version 4 or later  

GeoExplorer 3  
 
 

21 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.11GIS Data Files


GIS data files typically contain GPS positions, along with feature and
attribute information. They are stored in the SSF format. Normally the
filename extension is .ssf, but data files can also be given other
extensions to indicate that they have been imported from a GIS (.imp),
differentially corrected (.cor), or phase processed (.phs).
SSF files can be exported from the GPS Pathfinder Office software to
a Geographical Information System (GIS) in a variety of file formats.
SSF files can be transferred to and from some GIS data collectors, GIS
folders, and GIS PC cards.
Version 1.20 of the TerraSync software supports data files that include
Filename attributes. A Filename attribute lets you specify a file, such
as a sound or image file, to attach to the feature. If any data file that
you transfer has files attached to it, these attached files are transferred
with the data file.

20.11.1 Devices You Can Transfer GIS Data Files To or From

Data Transfer
Table 20.10 shows the devices that you can transfer GIS data files to
or from.
Table 20.10 Devices you can transfer GIS data files to or from

Transfer GIS Transfer GIS


Device Filename data files from data files to
CE device running the *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
TerraSync software *.phs
Field computer running the *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
ASPEN software *.phs
Data Collector running Asset *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
Surveyor version 5 or later *.phs
GeoExplorer 3 *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.phs

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 211


20 Types of Files

Table 20.10 Devices you can transfer GIS data files to or from (Continued)

Transfer GIS Transfer GIS


Device Filename data files from data files to
GeoExplorer II *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.phs
GeoExplorer *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.phs
 
 *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.phs
GIS PC card *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.phs
Pathfinder Basic *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.phs
E-mail account *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp,
*.phs
Data Transfer

21 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.12Help (.hlp) Files


Help files contain help text which can be displayed on a data collector.

20.12.1 Devices You Can Transfer Help Files To


Table 20.11 shows the devices that you can transfer help files to.
Table 20.11 Devices you can transfer help files to

Transfer help Transfer help


Device Filename files from files to
TSC1 data collector running *.hlp
the Asset Surveyor software

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 213


20 Types of Files

20.13 Language (.lng) Files


Language files contain translated text for messages, menus, and
commands for Trimble mapping or survey software.

20.13.1 Devices You Can Transfer Language Files To


Table 20.12 shows the devices that you can transfer language files to.
Table 20.12 Devices you can transfer language files to

Transfer Transfer
language files language files
Device Filename from to
Data Collector running the *.lng
Asset Surveyor software
GeoExplorer 3 *.lng
Data Transfer

21 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.14Other Files
Some devices can send or receive miscellaneous files. These files are
transferred as Other files.

20.14.1 Devices You Can Transfer Other Files To or From


Table 20.13 shows the devices that you can transfer other files to or
from.
Table 20.13 Devices you can transfer other files to or from

Transfer other Transfer other


Device Filename files from files to
CE device running the *.*
TerraSync software
Field computer running the *.*
ASPEN software
TSC1 data collector running satDGPS.ini
the Asset Surveyor software

Data Transfer
TDC1 data collector running barcode drivers
the Asset Surveyor software

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 215


20 Types of Files

20.15 Raw Observations (.dat files)


Raw observations are files of GPS position information recorded by a
GPS receiver. They can be transferred from GPS receivers, or can be
copied from the receiver to a device running the Trimble Survey
Controller software and transferred as copied receiver files.

20.15.1 Devices You Can Transfer Raw Observations To or From


Table 20.14 shows the devices that you can transfer raw observations
(.dat files) to or from. When the files have been copied to a device
running the Trimble Survey Controller software, they are listed as
copied receiver files.
Table 20.14 Devices you can transfer raw observations to or from

Transfer raw Transfer raw


Device Filename observations from observations to
4600LS receiver *.dat
4700 receiver *.dat
Data Transfer

4800 receiver *.dat


Series 4000 receiver *.dat
Data card from a survey data *.dat
collector

21 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Types of Files 20

20.16Station/Session Tables (.tab files)


A station/session table describes one or more stations (locations where
a receiver is set up to make observations for a static survey) and, for
each station, one or more sessions (periods of observation at that
station).
Once you have created a table, you send it to the GPS receiver. You
can then run the GPS receiver unattended—the table controls the
receiver so that observation sessions start and stop automatically.
A single station/session table usually contains definitions for all
stations in a project, regardless of how many receivers are being used.
When a receiver is set up at a site, it is programmed to use the station
that represents that site. Stations intended for use by other receivers
are never used.

20.16.1 Devices You Can Transfer Station/Session Tables To or


From
Table 20.15 shows the devices that you can transfer station/session
tables to or from.

Data Transfer
Table 20.15 Devices you can transfer station/session tables to or from

Transfer Transfer
station/session station/session
Device Filename tables from tables to
Series 4000 receiver *.tab

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 217


20 Types of Files

20.17 Waypoint (.wpt) Files


A waypoint is a position that you use as a reference point or marker. A
waypoint can be your base camp, a field site, a peg, or any other
significant point you want to navigate to or from, or use to orient
yourself.

20.17.1 Devices You Can Transfer Waypoint Files To or From


Table 20.16 shows the devices that you can transfer waypoint files to
or from.
Table 20.16 Devices you can transfer waypoint files to or from

Transfer raw Transfer raw


Device Filename observations from observations to
CE device running the *.wpt
TerraSync software
Field computer running the *.wpt
ASPEN software
Data Collector running the *.wpt
Data Transfer

Asset Surveyor software


GeoExplorer 3 *.wpt
GeoExplorer II *.wpt
GeoExplorer *.wpt
Pathfinder Basic *.wpt
E-mail account *.wpt

21 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

21
21 Troubleshooting
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Trimble diagnostic report
21 Troubleshooting

21.1 Introduction
Problems you may encounter when using the Data Transfer utility fall
into two main categories:
• difficulty establishing communication with a device
• difficulty transferring files to and from the device
Table 21.1 Communication Problems

 
 

Data Transfer cannot The cabling between the device and the office computer is not
connect to a device. connected correctly.
Consult the relevant connection topic, or the documentation for your
device, for cabling instructions specific to your device.

The device is not ready Some devices must be in a particular mode to communicate with
for transfer. the Data Transfer utility.
The COM port on the Consult the appropriate section of the device's documentation for
device is set incorrectly. the recommended COM port settings.
Data Transfer

The COM port in the Check that you have the device's cable connected to the correct
Data Transfer utility is serial port, and that the device properties specify the correct port. If
set incorrectly. you are not sure what the serial port you are using is called, try
connecting to each port in turn until you are successful.
Data Transfer cannot Give the file a different name or delete the file on the device and try
transfer files. again.
You are trying to transfer You are trying to send a file to a device when a file of that name
a file to a folder that you already exists on the device.
do not have write access Select a different destination folder or see your network
to. administrator to change your rights to that drive.
The selected destination Delete any unwanted files in the destination folder or select a
folder is full. different folder.
The device has run out Delete any unwanted data dictionaries or data files on the device.
of memory.

22 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Troubleshooting 21

Table 21.1 Communication Problems (Continued)

 
 

There are too many Close one or more of these applications.
applications running
simultaneously with the
Data Transfer utility.
The device has powered Check the battery and cabling. Replace or recharge the battery if
down midway through a necessary, or connect to an external power source.
transfer operation.

You are trying to send a Only one data dictionary can be stored on these data collectors, so
data dictionary to a when you send a data dictionary it overwrites the existing one.
GeoExplorer or Delete the data files on the GeoExplorer or GeoExplorer II that are
GeoExplorer II when using the data dictionary, or transfer these files to your office PC.
data files that use the You can now overwrite the data dictionary.
existing data dictionary
are still present on the
data collector.

Data Transfer

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 221


21 Troubleshooting

21.2 Trimble Diagnostic Report


If the troubleshooting solutions do not fix your problem, you may
need to contact Trimble Support. You will be asked to send a
diagnostic report, which details the settings on your computer and the
software and files that you have installed that may affect Data
Transfer's operation.
To generate the diagnostic report:
1. From the Trimble folder on the Start menu, choose Trimble
Diagnostics.
The Trimble Diagnostic Report progress dialog appears while
your computer is scanned. When the scan is complete, the
diagnostic report appears in the Trimble Diagnostic Report
window.
2. By default, only the standard report options are selected. If
required, select Options / Detailed to generate a detailed report.
3. Select an output method:
– To print the report, select File / Print.
Data Transfer

– To save the report as a text file, select File / Save As. Enter
a filename in the Save As dialog, browse for a folder if
necessary, and click Save.
– To e-mail the report to Trimble Support, select File / Send.
A new message is opened in your default e-mail editor,
with the Trimble Support address filled in the To field and
the diagnostic report already attached. Enter a subject line
and any details and send the e-mail message.
4. Select File / Exit to close the Trimble Diagnostic Report
window.

22 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Troubleshooting 21

21.2.1 Connecting To Devices


Select a device from the following list to view connection information
for that device.
For information on a device that is not listed here, refer to the
documentation for the device.
Asset Surveyor running on a:
• MC-V data collector
• TSC1 data collector
• TDC1 data collector
• TDC2 data collector
• CE device running TerraSync
• GeoExplorer 3 data collector
• GeoExplorer II data collector
• GeoExplorer data collector
• Field computer running ASPEN

Data Transfer
• Pathfinder Basic data collector

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 223


21 Troubleshooting
Data Transfer

22 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

22
22 The Differential Correction
Utility
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Differential GPS
■ Using Differential Correction
■ User Interface
■ Internet Search
■ Troubleshooting
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Introduction

22.1 Introduction
The Differential Correction utility is produced by Trimble Navigation
Limited for differentially correcting GPS field data. It runs under
Windows 95, Windows NT version 4 and higher, Windows 2000 and
Windows ME.
The Differential Correction Utility enables you to remove errors in
GPS data caused various factors. It improves the accuracy of GPS
positions from approximately 100 meters to between submeter and
five meters, depending on the receiver and data collection technique
used.
Differential Correction

22 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22

22.2 Differential GPS


Differential GPS is a data collection technique that uses an extra GPS
receiver and some complex calculations to increase the accuracy of
GPS positions. It is based on the fact that any pseudorange errors in a
GPS signal are common to all receivers within a radius of several
hundred miles. Differential GPS can provide accuracies from
submeter to around five meters. Without differential correction
accuracy may only be within 100 meters CEP.
The extra receiver, known as the base station, is placed on a known
reference position. It receives GPS data from all satellites in view. One
or more rover receivers collect GPS data at unknown locations using
some of the same satellites that the base is receiving data from.
Differential correction then compares the base station data with the
known base station location and computes the error associated with
each satellite pseudorange. This error is used to correct the rover
positions, improving their accuracy.
Differential GPS corrections can be applied at the time the data is
being collected in the field (real-time differential GPS using radios).
Differential corrections can also be applied in the office once the rover
and base station files are transferred to your office computer. This is
called postprocessed differential correction and is carried out by the
Differential Correction utility.

Factors Affecting Accuracy


Differential Correction
22.2.1

It is necessary to differentially correct your rover files to obtain the


specified accuracy for your receiver. There are many reasons why the
accuracy of your data may be degraded, some of which are described
in the following sections.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 227


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS

Multipath
GPS satellite signals can sometimes be reflected off larger nearby
objects, such as buildings or cars, causing an erroneous signal to be
received by the GPS antenna. This phenomenon is known as
“multipath”. Severe multipath can induce errors of dozens of meters,
while mild multipath can cause small errors of only a meter or less.
You can obtain optimal accuracy by collecting data in an environment
devoid of large reflective surfaces and with a clear view of the sky.

Number of Visible Satellites


A minimum number of satellites (usually four) is needed to calculate
an accurate position. If you have five or more satellites, this increases
the accuracy by only a small amount. You can obtain positions from
three satellites using 2D position mode, but this significantly reduces
the accuracy. To obtain the best possible accuracy, set the Position
mode on your data collector to Overdetermined—this makes sure that
at least five satellites are used.

Distance Between Base Station and Roving Receiver


Differential correction accuracy degrades as the distance between the
base station and the rover increases. An estimate of this degradation is
two parts per million (ppm). For example, 2 mm of degradation
occurs for every kilometer between the base and the rover.
If you code process your data with the Differential Correction utility,
Differential Correction

you should only collect data within 500 kilometers (approximately


310 miles) of your base station.
If you carrier phase process your data with the Differential Correction
utility, you should only collect data within 50 kilometers
(approximately 31 miles) of your base station.
Note – The Centimeter Process option will only calculate a fixed
solution if the distance between the base and rover is less than 10
kilometers (approximately 6 miles).

22 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22

PDOP
Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) is a measure of the current
satellite geometry. The lower the PDOP value, the more accurate the
GPS positions. You can configure the PDOP mask on your data
collector to make sure that only data of the required accuracy is
collected. If the PDOP exceeds the configured mask the data collector
stops logging positions. The recommended PDOP mask is six. If you
use a Pro XL™, Pro XR™, Pro XRS™ or Series 4000 receiver, a
PDOP mask of four is recommended for submeter accuracy.

SNR
Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is a measure of the strength of the satellite
signal relative to the background noise. Accuracy degrades as the
signal strength decreases. You can configure the SNR mask on your
data collector to log only GPS positions below a certain SNR value.
The recommended SNR mask is 6.
Note – PDOP and SNR act in opposite directions: greater accuracy is
achieved with low PDOP and high SNR.

Satellite Elevations
When a satellite is low on the horizon, the satellite signals must travel
a greater distance through the atmosphere, resulting in a lower signal
strength and delayed reception by the GPS receiver. Low-elevation
satellites tend to yield noisy data. Position data should be collected

Differential Correction
using only satellites that are at least 15º above the horizon. You can
configure the elevation mask on your data collector to ignore satellites
that are low in the sky. The recommended elevation mask is 15º.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 229


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS

Occupation Period
The Pathfinder Basic Series, GeoExplorer I and II, GeoExplorer 3™,
ProLite™, Professional™ and Pathfinder Card™ receivers give five-
meter accuracy with a one second occupation time. An accuracy of
two meters can be achieved by averaging positions over a period of
about three minutes (180 positions at a logging interval of one
second).
The GeoExplorer 3 data collector gives two-meter accuracy with a one
second occupation time.
The Pathfinder ProXL, ProXR, ProXRS, and Series 4000 receivers
achieve submeter accuracy with a one second occupation time. This
accuracy does not improve significantly over a longer occupation time.

22.2.2 Obtaining Optimal Accuracy


In addition to these factors, certain conditions must be met to make
sure that your differential correction produces the most accurate
positions possible. The Differential Correction utility outputs this
accuracy information in the form of precision estimates.

Synchronized Measurements
To obtain optimal accuracy from differential correction, the base
station must record synchronized measurement data (synced
measurements). Synchronized measurements occur when the base
Differential Correction

receivers record GPS pseudorange measurements on the GPS integer


second.
Synchronized measurements can be recorded by the following
compatible base stations:
• a 12-channel Maxwell-based Community Base Station (CBS)
when logging rate is set to base measurements
• a 12-channel ProXL, ProSR or ProXRS system, when
connected to a data collector running the Asset Surveyor
software in Base Station mode

23 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22

• a 12-channel 4600LS Surveyor, when connected to a data


collector running the Asset Surveyor software in Base Station
mode
• a Trimble Maxwell-based Series 4000 or 4400 receiver. The
4000SSE™ and the following 4000SE™ receivers are
Maxwell-based:
Land Surveyor II™
Land Surveyor IID™
System Surveyor II™
Geodetic Surveyor™
Geodetic System Surveyor™
GIS Surveyor Base Station™ (with carrier-phase recording
option)

B Tip – To determine if you are using a Maxwell-based receiver click Status,


then Options. This allows you to view Receiver Configuration. Click More
until Model is visible. If your receiver is not listed above, contact your local
Trimble dealer to learn about upgrade options.

• a GeoExplorer data collector and GeoExplorer II data collector


in High Accuracy Base mode.
All other Pathfinder GPS receivers used as base stations do not record
synchronized measurements.

Logging Intervals

Differential Correction
The optimum base and rover logging interval is five seconds. It is
recommended that you do not use an interval greater than 15 seconds.
The Differential Correction utility rejects any file with an interval
greater than 30 seconds.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 231


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS

Precision Estimates
The Differential Correction utility outputs accuracy information for
each GPS position that is successfully differentially corrected. Several
pieces of information are generated.
Positional Errors These errors are generated by the Differential
Correction utility for each position’s north, east and altitude
components. The information is displayed in terms of the standard
error for each component of the three dimensional position.
Figure 22.1 illustrates each component of the positional error.
Differential Correction

Figure 22.1 Positional error diagram

23 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22

Error Ellipse The error ellipse values generated by the Differential


Correction utility provide two-dimensional information with regard to
the relative orientation of the satellites. The error ellipse values
identify a major and minor axis, and the orientation of the major axis
(or deviation of the major axis from true north. Figure 22.2 illustrates
the components of the error ellipse:

Figure 22.2 Error ellipse

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 233


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS

Confidence Level The Differential Correction utility outputs a


confidence level for each GPS position. The statistical level of
confidence generated for each position can be 68% (1s), 95% (2s), or
99% (3s). This is configured in the GPS Pathfinder Office software’s
Options / Units dialog.

The confidence level, or probability, and the actual precision estimate


have an inverse relationship. That is, for a given position, the larger the
probability the smaller the estimate and vice versa. For example, for a
Differential Correction

single GPS position, you might have a 99% probability that the
position is within 2 meters of truth. However, for the same position,
you could have a 68% probability that the position is within 0.6 meters
of truth.
Factors which can influence the accuracy of precision estimates
include the type of receiver you use, the distance between the base and
rover receivers, distance between base station and roving receiver,
position dilution of precision (PDOP), and reference variances
produced during carrier phase processing.

23 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22

22.2.3 Base Files


In order to use a base station for differential correction you must
record the data into one or more base files. Base files must meet the
following criteria:
• The base files must cover the same time period as the rover
file(s).
• The base files must collect data from all satellites that the
rover(s) used for position computation. To make sure that the
satellites used by the rover are a subset of the satellites used by
the base, the base station must have a clear view of the sky and a
lower elevation mask than the rover. The rover should be limited
to working within 500 kilometers (approximately 310 miles) of
a base station to avoid satellite tracking mismatches between
base and rovers.
Note – If you want to carrier phase process your data in the
Differential Correction utility, the distance between your base
and rovers should be no greater than 50 kilometers
(approximately 31 miles). In addition, the Centimeter
Processing option will only calculate a fixed solution if the
distance between you base and rovers is less than 10 kilometers
(approximately 6 miles).
• The base file logging intervals must be set correctly. The
satellite measurements in each base file must be continuous and
at an interval no greater than one set of measurements every 30

Differential Correction
seconds.
• You must know the reference position where the base file(s) was
collected. If you use more than one base file in a session, each
file must have been collected at the same reference position.
Public data sources such as Community Base Stations normally
have the correct reference position set in the header of the base
files.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 235


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS

• All base files must be in the same format. The Trimble SSF and
DAT formats and the RINEX format are supported. Compressed
SSF, DAT or RINEX base files, with a .zip, .exe, or .gz
extension are also supported.
If your base files meet these conditions then you can differentially
correct your data files using the Differential Correction utility.

22.2.4 Centimeter Processing Options


If you have purchased the GPS Pathfinder Office Centimeter
Processing option, it is possible to achieve higher levels of accuracy
with the Differential Correction utility. This option works with the
carrier phase processing option in the Differential Correction utility, to
better process your data.
For data to be processed using the Centimeter Processing option it
must satisfy the following requirements:
• Features must be collected within a continuous carrier block of
at least 45 minutes duration
• The base line (distance between the base and rover) for the data
must be less than 10 kilometers
• Data must be collected using a GPS Pathfinder ProXR or
ProXRS receiver
In order to get the best possible precision it is also important to make
Differential Correction

sure that your base station reference position is accurate, and that the
coordinate system and zone used for displaying and entering
coordinates is correct. In addition, the antenna height in the rover file
must be correctly entered (including the antenna type), and the
antenna must be kept very stable while logging data.
Positions corrected using the Centimeter Processing option are
reported as Fixed solutions in the Differential Correction summary
window.

23 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22

For more information on carrier phase data collection and the


Centimeter Processing option, please refer to the Asset Surveyor or
ASPEN Operation Manual.

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 237


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction

22.3 Using Differential Correction


This section explains how to carry out basic tasks using the
Differential Correction utility. For information on specific dialogs and
controls see User Interface, page 251. For general information on how
to use the Differential Correction windows and dialogs, see Basics of
Operation in the GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide.
Note – Make differential correction the first step that you perform
after transferring the data from the field data collector to the office
computer. If you want to display, edit, combine, or otherwise
manipulate data files, do so after they are differentially corrected.

22.3.1 Starting Differential Correction


Before you can start the Differential Correction utility, Microsoft
Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder
Office software must be installed. Start the Differential Correction
utility from within the GPS Pathfinder Office software, or start it
directly from Windows.
To start Differential Correction from the GPS Pathfinder Office
software:
• Select Utilities / Differential Correction from the menu bar.
To start the Differential Correction utility from Windows:
1. Click .
Differential Correction

2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> /


Differential Correction from the menu.

23 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22

The main Differential Correction window appears:

22.3.2 Selecting Rover Files

Differential Correction
By default, the last-used set of files are selected as rover files. They
appear in the Selected Files list. For example, if you just downloaded a
set of data files using the Data Transfer utility, these files would be
selected. If these are the files you want to correct, simply go to the
next step. If not, you need to change the list.
Note – The files should not span more than seven days (from the
earliest selected file to the latest selected file).

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 239


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction

To change the list of selected input files:


1. Click Browse in the Rover Files group. The Select Rover Files
dialog appears:

2. Replace or modify the list of input files and click Open.

22.3.3 Selecting Base Files


The next step is to select the base files to be used to process the
selected rover files. You can do this automatically or manually. All
selected files must be in the same format (that is: SSF, DAT, RNX,
Differential Correction

ZIP, EXE, or GZ).


Note – Compressed base files cannot be decompressed if the folder
they reside in is 'read-only'. Make sure that you have full access
privileges to the folder that your base files reside in.
The three ways to select base files are described in the following
sections.
• Using Local Search
• Using Internet Search
• Using Browse

24 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22

Using Local Search


To automatically select base files from a local folder:
1. Click Local Search. The Local Search for Base Files dialog
appears:

2. The Folder field displays the folder that will be searched for
base files. By default, it points to the base file folder of the
current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder. Click Browse if
you need to change it.
The Preferred Base File Prefix field allows you to specify a one
or two character prefix included in the base file name (for
example b) to speed the search for Base files.
The Maximum Base File Span field allows you to enter the
maximum number of hours that each base file covers.
For more details see Local Search for Base Files Dialog,

Differential Correction
page 258.
3. Once you have selected the base file folder and altered any
necessary fields, click Search to initiate the search.
When the search is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files,
page 245 dialog appears.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 241


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction

Using Internet Search


To automatically select base files from a Web address:
1. Click Internet Search. The Internet Search dialog appears:

Note – This dialog only appears if a base station provider has


been previously configured. For more information on
configuring a base station provider from the Internet, see
Internet Search, page 286.
The Base Data Provider field provides a drop-down list of
names of Web page owners from which base data can be
retrieved. Click Properties to see more details on the base data
provider.

B Tip – If your base data provider is not listed, click New to add a new
provider. See New Base Station Provider Click New to select a new base
station provider, the following dialog appears:, page 261. for details on
adding a new base station provider.

2. Select your preferred base data provider from the drop-down list
Differential Correction

and click OK.

24 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22

The Confirm Internet Setup dialog appears:

3. Click Yes to continue.


The Copying Files from Internet dialog appears:

Differential Correction

This dialog shows the files names being searched for and the
status of the download operation. When the download operation
is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears.
For more information, see page 245.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 243


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction

Using Browse
To manually select base files:
1. Click Browse in the Base Files group. The Select Base Files
dialog appears:

2. Select the appropriate base files and click Open.


When the files are open, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog
appears. For more information, see page 245.
Differential Correction

24 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22

22.3.4 Confirm Selected Base Files


The Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears when base files have
been selected using Local Search, Internet Search, or Browse in the
Differential Correction main window.

There are five columns in the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog:

Column Displays
Rover Files the rover files that were selected
Coverage Full, Partial, or None. This indicates how much of each
rover file is covered by the selected base file(s).
Base File the base file(s) that were found
Start Time the start times for both the rover and base files
End Time the end times for both the rover and base files
Differential Correction

C Warning – If a rover file is not fully covered by the base file(s), positions
outside the coverage will not be differentially corrected.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 245


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction

Note – There is a problem with velocity records in ASPEN version


1.11. The header of the data file will be incorrect if velocity records
are logged before the first position. This may cause the Differential
Correction utility to auto-select base files that do not cover all velocity
records. To overcome this problem, manually select all required base
files.
Click OK to accept the base file(s) that are open, or Cancel to return to
the main window and select other base files.

22.3.5 Specifying the Reference Position


It is essential for good differential correction that the known reference
position is accurate. When you click OK in the Confirm Selected Base
Files dialog, the Reference Position dialog appears so that you can
check the reference position and the height of the base station antenna:
Differential Correction

Note – If a previous differential correction session used base files that


have the same reference position as the one(s) currently selected, and
the Reference Confirmation field has been set to Not Required if
Identical to Previous Session, this dialog does not appear.

24 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22

If necessary, simply edit the fields. Alternatively, you can select the
reference position from a different base file that contains correct
reference position coordinates. If you want to view the coordinates in
a different coordinate system, click Change in the Reference Position
dialog. The Coordinate System dialog appears. Select the coordinate
system.
If your base files come from a public data source such as a Trimble
Reference Station (TRS) or Community Base Station (CBS), the
reference position is probably accurate. In this case, do not edit any of
the fields in this dialog unless you are certain about what you are
doing.
To select the reference position from a base file:
1. Click Set From Base File in the Reference Position dialog. The
following dialog appears:

Differential Correction
2. Highlight the base file that has the correct reference position for
your use and click OK. The reference position from the file
appears in the Reference Position dialog.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 247


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction

22.3.6 Confirming Reference Position Adjustments


When you click OK in the Reference Position dialog, the following
dialog appears if the reference position of any base file does not match
the reference position you specified:

This dialog shows how far the reference position of the GPS system
will be moved to match the reference position entered previously. A
distance of less than 100 meters usually indicates that a reference
position was created from an individual GPS position when the base
file was collected.
To confirm the position adjustment:
1. Check the distances displayed in the dialog.
2. If a distance displayed for a base file is greater than 100 meters,
the base file may have been collected at a different location. See
Differential Correction

Confirm Reference Position Adjustments Dialog, page 275 for


more details on the implications of base file distances.
If you want to exclude a base file from the list, highlight it and
click Exclude.

C Warning – Excluding base files may leave gaps in your base file
coverage. As a result, some positions in your rover files may not be
corrected.

3. Click OK.

24 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22

22.3.7 Generating the Corrected Files


The Corrected Files window lets you specify the path and folder that
the output files will be written to. The current path and folder is
displayed alongside the Output Folder button. By default it is the
current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
To change the output folder:
• Type the output folder path and name directly into the box
provided.
OR
• Click Browse. The Browse for Folder dialog appears. Use it to
select a different folder.
To correct the rover files:
1. Click OK. The time required for correcting the rover files varies
depending on the size of the files, the number of base files used,
and the speed of your office computer.
2. When differential correction is successful, a message similar to
the following appears:

Differential Correction

If not all the positions in the file are corrected successfully, click
More Details to see a detailed log. The log file tells you which
file the uncorrected positions are in, and may give reasons why
the positions could not be corrected.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 249


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction

22.3.8 Troubleshooting
If differential correction is unsuccessful a message similar to the
following appears:

Click More Details to see a detailed log of the differential correction


process. The log file gives the basic reasons for the differential
correction failure. For more details, see the base or rover audit file.
Audit files track the differential correction process, and you may be
able to isolate the point at which the operation failed. For more
information, see Audit File Contents, page 278. Common reasons for
failure are also documented in Troubleshooting, page 293.

22.3.9 Exiting the Differential Correction Utility


The Differential Correction Utility automatically closes when a
correction operation is completed successfully. If differential
correction was not successful and you want to repeat the process,
Differential Correction

restart the Differential Correction utility.


To exit the Differential Correction utility:
• Click Close.
The Differential Correction utility exits and closes its window.

25 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

22.4 User Interface


This section contains a detailed, field-by-field description of the
Differential Correction utility. Use it as a reference guide. When you
start the Differential Correction utility, the Differential Correction
window appears:

Differential Correction
The following sections describe this window and any dialogs that you
can access from it.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 251


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

22.4.1 Differential Correction Window


The main window of the Differential Correction utility consists of four
groups of controls. They display the selected rover and base files, the
folder where the corrected files will be stored and the extension they
will be given, and the processing options. Command buttons let you
begin the correction process or alter program settings.
This section describes each area of this window in turn.
Rover Files This group lets you specify the files to be differentially
corrected.

The Folder field displays the current path and folder of the selected
files.
The Selected Files list displays the names of the rover files that will be
differentially corrected. By default, these are the last-used set of files.
If you have just downloaded a set of SSF files from a data collector,
for example, they will appear. Use the scroll bar or up arrow and down
arrow to view all the files if there are too many to fit in the box.
Differential Correction

25 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

The Browse button lets you select a different set of rover files. When
you click it, the following dialog appears:

The selected rover files are highlighted in the box. There are several
ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file, or holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on a number of files.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on the files with the mouse.
Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and clicking on
Differential Correction

the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including
that file will be selected or unselected.
• Details of the selected file, or last selected file, are displayed at
the bottom of the dialog.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 253


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Base Files This group lets you specify the base files that will be used
to differentially correct the rover files.

The Folder field displays the current path and folder of the selected
base files.
The Selected Files list displays the names of the base files that will be
used to differentially correct the rover files. Use the scroll bar or up
arrow and down arrow to view all the files if there are too many to fit
in the box.
Local Search This button lets you automatically select base files from
a local folder. You can configure the search and edit its results.
Note – You must select one or more rover files before clicking Local
Search. The start and end times of the rover files are used as the
criteria for base file selection.
Click Local Search and the Local Search for Base Files dialog
appears. For more information see Local Search for Base Files Dialog,
page 258.
Differential Correction

Internet Search This button lets you automatically select base files
from a base data provider with a Web page. You can configure the
search and edit its results.
Note – You must select one or more rover files before clicking Internet
Search. The start and end times of the rover files are used as the
criteria for base file selection.
Click Internet Search and the Internet Search dialog appears. For
more information see Internet Search, page 286.

25 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Browse This button in the Base Files group lets you select a set of
base files.
Click Browse. The following dialog appears:

The selected base files are highlighted in the File name window. There
are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file, or holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on a number of files.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on the files with the mouse.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and clicking on Differential Correction
the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including
that file will be selected or unselected.
Details of the selected file, or last selected file, are displayed at the
bottom of the dialog.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 255


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Selecting Base Files for Updated Files


If you have reopened a rover file and added GPS positions, you will
have periods of time that base station data is not required. Using the
local search and internet search functions in the Differential
Correction utility you will obtain base files covering the complete time
span of the file. This may lead to downloading unnecessary files. The
alternative is to download the base files manually.
To do this you need to determine the time periods of the GPS data in
the rover file. Open the rover file in the time line view in the GPS
Pathfinder Office software and note the start and stop times for the
GPS positions. Note that these times are in local time, not GPS time.
Select the matching base files from your usual base station provider
and transfer them to the base folder of the appropriate project. Now
use the Local Search button to select them. You will be prompted that
coverage is less than 100%, however you should be able to proceed
and correct all of the GPS positions in the rover file.
Note – To identify the matching base files look at the date and time
property of each file. Alternatively, look at the base file name, which is
often in year-month-day-hour format.
Base stations create filenames using either local time or GPS time. To
interpret the filenames correctly, you need to know your base station
provider’s file format.
Corrected Files This group lets you specify the folder where the
differentially corrected output files will be stored. You can also specify
Differential Correction

the extension of the output files.

The Output Folder field displays the current output folder. By default
this is the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.

25 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

The Browse button lets you change the output folder. Click Browse
and the Browse for Folder dialog appears. See the Basics of Operation
chapter in the GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide for
information on this dialog.
The File Extension field specifies the three-letter file extension that
will be added to your corrected files. By default the extension is COR.
To change the extension, enter the new extension into this field.
Note – Differential Correction does not allow the input and output
files to have the same extension.
Processing This group lets you select the type of processing that will
be performed by the Differential Correction utility.

Table 22.1 shows the options available:


Table 22.1 Processing group contents

Option Description
Smart Code and The rover files will be differentially corrected first. Any
Carrier Phase files with carrier data will be subsequently processed
Processing for carrier phase correction.
Code Processing The rover files will be differentially corrected only,

Differential Correction
Only regardless of the content of the data files.
Carrier Phase The rover files will be carrier phase processed only.
Processing Only

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 257


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Control Buttons

Click OK to begin differential correction. A series of progress bars


will indicate the status of the differential correction process.
Click Cancel or Close to exit the Differential Correction program
without differentially correcting any data.
Click Help to access the online help system. Click on a topic; the
Differential Correction Help displays information on that topic.
Click Settings to set up parameters for differential correction. The
Differential Correction Settings dialog appears. For more information
see Differential Correction Settings, page 277.

22.4.2 Local Search for Base Files Dialog


When you click Local Search the following dialog appears:
Differential Correction

Use this dialog to specify the kind of search and the folder to be
searched.

25 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Note – The Local search for base files function may not work reliably
when base files have a rollover period of less than one hour or have
file names of eight digits but which are not in the standard
(YYMMDDHH) format. To overcome this problem, manually select the
base files using the Browse button.
Search In This window contains controls for setting the folder in
which to search for base files.
The Folder field displays the folder that will be searched for base files.
By default, it points to the base file folder of the current GPS
Pathfinder Office project folder. Click Browse if you need to change
it. The Browse for Folder dialog appears:

Differential Correction
Preferred Base File Prefix This field lets you specify a one or two
character prefix included in the base file name (for example "b") to
help speed the search.
Maximum Base File Span This field lets you enter the maximum
number of hours that each base file covers.
Search Click this button to initiate the search. When the search is
complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears and you can
accept or modify the results.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 259


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Selecting Base Files for Updated Files If you have reopened a rover
file and added GPS positions, you will have periods of time that base
station data is not required. Using the local search and internet search
functions in the Differential Correction utility you will obtain base
files covering the complete time span of the file. This may lead to
downloading unnecessary files. The alternative is to download the
base files manually.
To do this you need to determine the time periods of the GPS data in
the rover file. Open the rover file in the time line view in the GPS
Pathfinder Office software and note the start and stop times for the
GPS positions. Note that these times are in local time, not GPS time.
Select the matching base files from your usual base station provider
and download them to the base folder of the appropriate project. Now
use the Local Search button to select them. You will be prompted that
coverage is less than 100%, however you should be able to proceed
and correct all of the GPS positions in the rover file.
Note – To identify the matching base files look at the date and time
property of each file. Alternatively, look at the base file name, which is
often in year-month-day-hour format.
Note – Base stations create filenames using either local time or GPS
time. To interpret the filenames correctly, you need to know your base
station provider’s file format.
Differential Correction

26 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

22.4.3 Internet Search Dialog


When you click Internet Search the following dialog appears:

Note – If a base station provider has not been previously setup, you
will be prompted to do so. See Using Internet Search (First Time),
page 286 for more information on setting up a base station provider.
Base Data Provider This field displays the name of the organization
from which base data was last retrieved. Click on the drop-down arrow
to select from the drop-down list of previously used providers.
New Base Station Provider Click New to select a new base station
provider, the following dialog appears:

Differential Correction
This dialog lets you specify how the new provider will be setup.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 261


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Table 22.2 shows the options available:


Table 22.2 New Base Station Provider dialog contents

Option Description
Select from the current list Select this option to select base station files from
a list of Internet base station data providers. The
base station providers are sorted and listed with
the closest providers to your rover files listed
first.
Copy the most up-to-date The list of Internet base data providers changes
list from the Trimble often. Select this option to automatically get the
Internet site, and select latest list from the Trimble Internet server. Then
from it select from the list, listing the closest provider to
your rover files first.
Enter the details yourself The Provider Properties dialog is displayed,
letting you manually enter the details of your
base station provider. For more information on
this dialog, see Provider Properties, page 290.

Delete Click this button to remove the currently displayed base station
provider from the list.
Properties Click this button to display the properties of the currently
selected base station provider, the Provider Properties dialog appears.
For more information on this dialog, see Provider Properties,
page 290.
OK Click this button to begin searching. The Differential Correction
Differential Correction

utility searches in the address displayed in the Internet Server note tab
of the Provider Properties dialog for files that cover the rover files.

22.4.4 Provider Properties Dialog


The Provider Properties dialog lets you view and edit the settings for
your base data provider. If you configure a base data provider by
selecting it from a list the provider properties will be automatically
filled in, however, if you wish to set up a new base data provider
manually you will need to fill the fields of the dialog.

26 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

When setting up a new base data provider manually, the Provider


Properties dialog appears as follows:

The four note tabs in this dialog are described in the following
sections.
General tab This tab provides general information about the base
station provider. Each field in the tab is described in the sections

Differential Correction
below.
Note – Only the Organization field is required, all the others are
optional.
Organization This field lets you specify the organization that owns
the base station.
Station Location This field lets you specify the location of the base
station.
Postal Address This field lets you specify the postal address of the
base station owner.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 263


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Contact Name This field lets you specify the contact name for the
base data provider.
Web Home Page This field lets you enter the Web address for the
base station provider’s home page.
Go To Click this button to launch your Web browser and go to the
Web address in the Web Home Page field. If nothing happens when
you click the Go To button, then Windows is probably not set up to
automatically launch your Web browser. Manually open your
preferred Web browser and then click the Go To button. If this also
fails, select the address in the Web home page field, and copy and paste
this into the URL address field of your browser.
E-mail Address This field lets you enter the e-mail address of the
base station provider contact person.
Send Mail Click this button to send an e-mail to the base station
provider contact person. The address entered in the E-mail Address
field will be used. If this does not work, then it is likely that your
e-mail application is not set up appropriately, so manually copy the
e-mail address into your e-mail application.
Telephone This field lets you specify the telephone number of the
base station provider.
Fax This field lets you specify the fax number of the base station
provider.
BBS Number This field lets you specify the Bulletin Board Service
Differential Correction

(BBS) number of the base station provider.

26 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

22.4.5 Base Station Tab


The Base Station tab provides information about the type of base
station and the reference position of the base station. It appears as
follows:

Note – All the fields from this dialog are optional.


The following sections describe each field in the dialog.
Receiver Type This field lets you specify the type of GPS receiver Differential Correction
used at the base station.
Base Station Type This field lets you specify the type of base station
used. For example, type Trimble CBS if the base station is a Trimble
Community Base Station.
Other Information This field lets you enter any additional information
about the base station. For example, you may wish to take note of any
operational details of the base station.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 265


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Reference Position (WGS-84) This group lets you enter the reference
position for the base station. The reference position should be entered
in Latitude/Longitude (WGS-84) coordinates.

22.4.6 Internet Server Tab


The Internet Server tab contains the controls for specifying the
address of the base station provider and the structure of file names
generated by the provider.
Differential Correction

The following sections describe each field in the dialog.

C Warning – It is important that you enter the correct information in this


dialog. If you are unsure about what to enter, contact your system
administrator or Internet service provider.

26 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Address format This field lets you enter the Internet address and the
format that will be used to search for base files. Enter the address and
the filename format of the base files. The filename format usually
begins and ends with the substitution string “%”, and uses “Y”, or
“YY” for year, “MM” for month, “DD” for day and “HH” for hour
(for example:
ftp://ftp.trimble.com/public/trsdata/T%YMMDDHH%.exe).
The address format does not have to be an Internet address (ftp:// or
http://). It can also be a drive on your computer or Local Area
Network. This would be very useful if you have a Trimble Reference
Station (TRS) or a Community Base Station (CBS) on your
organization's network. For example, you might enter:
file://N:\public\cbs\%YYMMDDHH%.zip or just
N:\public\cbs\%YYMMDDHH%.zip. When you perform an Internet
search, this will copy the required files from CBS folder on the
N: drive to your project base folder.
Note – The file:// protocol does not support long names for files or
folders.
Base Server Type This group lets you specify the type of base server
used by the base data provider. Table 22.3 outlines the options
available:
Table 22.3 Base Server Type group contents

Option Description

Differential Correction
US NGS Select US NGS CORS Format (Continuously Operating
CORS Reference Station) if the base station provider is a US NGS
Format CORS base station. You are then required to enter in a base
station identification code.
Other Select Other if the base station provider is not a CORS base
station. You must then enter the time format of the base data
filename, and the time span of the base files.

For more details on finding base files via the Internet, see Using a
CORS site, page 268.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 267


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Using a CORS site When you select one of the CORS sites from the
Internet Base Data Provider list the provider properties will be
automatically filled in. You can view these by clicking Properties on
the Internet Search dialog.

The URL below contains a template for start time, duration, year, day
of year and a four-character site name
Differential Correction

http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgi-
cors/ufcors2.prl?newstart=%HH%&duration=%LL%&year=%YYY
Y%&yearday=%DDDDD%&siteselection=%CCCC%&epic="As
Is"&datasheets=no&compr=pkzip

26 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Table 22.4 defines this address format.


Table 22.4 Address formats

Mask Description
%HH% Start hour of the day (0, 1, …, 23)
%LL% Duration (1, …, 24)
%YYYY% Start year
%DDDDD% Start day of year
%CCCC% CORS station identifier (4-character)

When the Differential Correction utility evaluates the URL for a


CORS site, it substitutes the appropriate values for the masks to obtain
the final URL. Submitting this URL initiates the download of files.
If you have problems connecting to the CORS site, you can download
files manually from http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgi-cors/ufcors2.prl.
Troubleshooting If you still have difficulty connecting to the CORS
site, see Internet Problems, page 299. Alternatively, contact the
Technical Assistance Center on the Trimble website at
www.trimble.com/support/support.htm or send an e-mail to
trimble_support@trimble.com.

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 269


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

22.4.7 Security Tab


The Security tab lets you specify whether the base data provider’s
Internet server is publicly accessible or not.

The following sections describe each field in the dialog.


Public Access Select this option if your base data provider’s Internet
server is accessible by the general public.
Differential Correction

Restricted Access Select this option if your base data provider’s


Internet server is accessible only by users who have been allocated the
appropriate access rights. You will then be required to enter a user
name and password to access the server.

27 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

22.4.8 Confirm Selected Base Files Dialog


When an automatic search for base files is complete, the Confirm
Selected Base Files dialog appears:

The Rover Files column lists the rover files that were selected.
The Coverage column indicates how much of each rover file is
covered by the selected base files.
Table 22.5 shows the three possible values:
Table 22.5 Selected Base Files dialog values

Value Description
Full The rover file is fully covered by the listed base file(s). All

Differential Correction
positions in it should be differentially correctable.
Partial The rover file is partially covered by the listed base file(s). Only
some of the positions in this file can be differentially corrected.
Use the Start Time and End Time columns to see which parts of
the rover file are not covered.
None The rover file is not covered by the listed base file(s). No
positions in this file can be differentially corrected.

The Base File column lists the base file(s) that were found.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 271


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

The Start Time and End Time columns display the start and end times
for both the rover and base files.
To hide the base file names, click on the to the left of each rover
filename or double-click the rover filename. The base file names are
hidden.
Click OK if you are satisfied that base file coverage is adequate. This
opens the Reference Position dialog or returns you to the Differential
Correction window.

22.4.9 Reference Position Dialog


This dialog may appear after you manually or automatically select
base files:
Differential Correction

Use it to check that the coordinates of the reference position and the
antenna height used at the base station are correctly entered.

C Warning – An incorrect reference position will create errors in your


corrected rover files.

27 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

If you always use base files from the same source, such as a
Community Base Station, you may not need to make this check.
Note – This dialog does not appear if all selected base files have the
same reference position, and this position is the same as that used in
the previous session. If you always use base files from the same source,
such as a Community Base Station, the dialog will probably not
appear. You can force the dialog to appear every time by selecting the
Always Required option in the Options note tab of the Differential
Correction Settings dialog.
The fields and buttons in this dialog are described in the following
sections.
Reference Position The fields in this group specify the coordinates of
the reference position of the selected base files. By default, these
coordinates are taken from the first selected base file. They must be in
terms of the current coordinate system, displayed at the bottom of the
dialog.
The Station Northing and Station Easting fields may be replaced by
Latitude and Longitude, depending on the coordinate system.
The Height field displays either MSL (Mean Sea Level) or
HAE (Height Above Ellipsoid), depending on the setting in the
coordinate system.
Note – It is important that these fields show the exact coordinates of
the reference position. In many cases they are supplied automatically,
but if you recorded the base files yourself, you must enter them

Differential Correction
manually.

C Warning – Take care to enter the correct hemisphere (N, S, E, or W)


when entering a reference position as a Latitude/Longitude. Also make
sure you know whether your reference height is in HAE or MSL.

The Antenna Height field specifies the height of the base station
antenna. To obtain a height, measure from the ground to a specified
point on the antenna. Consult your antenna documentation to establish
this specified point.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 273


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Note – It is important to enter the precise antenna height of the


selected base files. In many cases this is supplied automatically, but if
you recorded the base files yourself you must enter the height
manually. For base files collected with an Asset Surveyor data
collector, the antenna height will show as zero. This is because it has
already been added to the station height.
Set From Base File This button lets you specify the reference
position coordinates and antenna height from a base file that you
choose. Use it if the values displayed in the dialog are not correct, but
are correct in another base file.
When you click Set From Base File, the following dialog appears:
Differential Correction

Select the base file with the correct reference position and click OK.
The Choose Reference Position dialog disappears and the reference
position is updated in the Confirm Reference Position dialog.

27 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Coordinate System

This group displays the current coordinate system and zone (or site).
The Differential Correction utility interprets the reference position
coordinates in terms of this coordinate system. By default it is
Latitude/Longitude in the WGS-84 datum.
The Change button lets you change the current coordinate system.
You need to do this if you want to enter the reference position in a
different coordinate system and zone. Click Change and the
Coordinate System dialog appears. Select the coordinate system and
zone, or the local site, then click OK to return to the Reference Position
dialog.

22.4.10 Confirm Reference Position Adjustments Dialog


When you have confirmed the reference position by clicking OK in
the Reference Position or Choose Reference Position dialog, the
following dialog may appear:

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 275


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

The Confirm Reference Position Adjustments dialog shows the


differences between the confirmed reference position and the actual
reference positions within each base file. The Distance column shows
the full distance, and the Longitude, Latitude, and Height columns
show the distances along the corresponding axes.
The dialog will not appear if all distances are 0.
Use this dialog to determine if any base files were not recorded at the
reference position entered in the Reference Position dialog. You might
have selected base files from different locations. Alternatively, the
search folder may contain files from different locations that were
selected automatically.
Use the distance as the criterion:
• A distance of less than 100 meters usually indicates that a
reference position was created from an individual GPS position
when the base file was collected.
• A distance of greater than 100 meters generally indicates that
the base file was collected at a different location from the other
base files. This base file should not be used together with the
other base files. Exclude it or reselect the correct base files.

B Tip – A surer method of excluding the wrong base files is to keep base
files from different locations in separate folders so they can never be
selected together.
Differential Correction

• A very large distance (hundreds of thousands or millions of


meters) usually indicates that a base file does not have a
reference position. In effect, the reference position is at 0ºN,
0ºE. The distance shown is the distance between this position
and the confirmed reference position. Generally, these files can
be used as long as you are sure that they were collected at the
confirmed reference position.
Exclude Click this button to remove the highlighted base file from the
list. This base file will not be used to differentially correct the data
files. The discussion above indicates when to exclude base files.

27 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

C Warning – Excluding base files may leave gaps in your base file
coverage. As a result, some positions in your rover files may not be
corrected.

22.4.11 Differential Correction Settings


In the Differential Correction window, click Settings to display the
Differential Correction Settings dialog. This dialog lets you set the
parameters for differential correction. It consists of four tabbed pages.
Each tab is described in a separate section below.

Output
This tab controls the output settings for the corrected files and audit
files. It appears as follows:

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 277


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Output Positions These options lets you specify the type of data to be
output to the corrected file. Table 22.6 shows the contents of the
Output Positions options.
Table 22.6 Output Positions contents

Option Description
Corrected Only Only corrected position and velocity records are
output.
Corrected and Both corrected and uncorrected position and
Uncorrected velocity records are output.

Audit File Contents These options lets you specify what is written to
audit files. If differential correction is unsuccessful, you can use these
audit files to help determine why.
Rover audit files contain a variety of information that can be used to
trace the problems with differential correction. They list processing
parameters, available ephemeris data, and the number of position and
velocity records processed in each satellite constellation tracked. The
files also contain the final warning and/or error messages that can
indicate why a differential correction failed.
Rover audit files are created in the same folder as the corrected rover
files. One audit file is created per input rover file. Audit files have the
same prefix as the rover file and the extension, aur.
A base audit file is created in the same folder as the base file(s). Only
Differential Correction

one base audit file is created per differential correction session. If only
one base file was used to differentially correct the rover data, the file
name is the prefix of the base file and the extension, aub. If more than
one base file was used, the file name is Combbase.aub. If the
Differential Correction utility cannot put the aub file in the base file
folder, for example if it is full or you do not have write access to it,
then the aub file will be put in the GPS Pathfinder Office software’s
temporary folder, which is \Windows\PFCommon\Temp by default.

27 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Table 22.7 shows the options available:


Table 22.7 Audit File contents

Option Description
None No audit file will be produced.
Standard A standard audit file is produced, showing basic
information about the differential correction session.
Expanded An expanded audit file is produced, showing
detailed epoch-by-epoch information about the
differential correction session.

Base Options
This tab controls the processing of the base files. It appears as follows:

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 279


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Reference Confirmation These options control whether the


Reference Position dialog appears every time you select base files.
Table 22.8 shows the options available:
Table 22.8 Reference Confirmation contents

Option Description
Always Required The Reference Position dialog is always displayed
after selecting base files.
Not Required if The Reference Position dialog is only displayed if
Identical to Previous the reference position in all selected base files is
Session not the same as that used in the previous session.

If you always use base files from the same source, such as a
Community Base Station, you can select Not Required if Identical to
Previous Session in order to suppress the Reference Position dialog.
With this option set, you only see the dialog if you select base files
with a different reference position from that used in the previous
session. This can occur if you change the source of your base files.

B Tip – Select the Always Required option if you record your own base files.
If the reference position is omitted or entered incorrectly in the field, it
must be entered correctly in the Reference Position dialog, otherwise the
positions in your corrected rover files will be wrong.

Elevation This field lets you specify the minimum elevation. Usually
Differential Correction

you set the elevation mask in your base station data collector. If for
some reason it was set incorrectly, however, you can specify it here
and filter out any data that was collected from satellites too low on the
horizon. Base station data from any satellite that is below the specified
elevation is not used in differential correction.
Note – A value of 0º indicates that no positions will be filtered out.

28 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

SNR This field lets you specify the minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio
(SNR). Usually you set the SNR mask in your base station data
collector. If for some reason it was set incorrectly, however, you can
specify it here and filter out any data that was collected from satellites
with a low SNR. Base station data from any satellite that has an SNR
below the specified value is not used in differential correction.
Note – A value of 0 indicates that no positions will be filtered out.

Code Processing
This tab controls the processing of the rover files. It appears as
follows:

Differential Correction

Rover Processing Technique Noise reduction by filtering velocities


can be used to improve the results when the rover file data has been
affected by multipath (generally indicated by “spikes” in line and area
features).

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 281


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

You may suspect multipath if differentially corrected rover data


collected by a stationary receiver exhibits a tendency to wander
excessively. For example, rover data collected by a Pro XR or Pro
XRS based system typically does not fluctuate by more than about a
meter. Rover data collected with any 2, 3, or 6-channel receiver does
not tend to fluctuate by more than about 2 to 5 meters.
Note – Only use velocity filtering if you collected velocity data in your
rover file(s). If no velocity data is present, velocity filtering will not
improve results.
Table 22.9 shows the options available:
Table 22.9 Rover Processing Technique Noise contents

Option Description
Standard Results in standard, epoch by epoch processing.
This is the default option for processing rover data.
With Velocity Filtering Filters the rover data based on velocity data in the
file. Velocity data is used to help predict where the
next position should be, and smooth out any large
leaps or spikes in the data.
This setting is recommended if you are mobile and
in a multipath environment, for example if you are
driving and recording streets in an urban
environment.

Correct Velocity Records Select this check box to differentially


correct any velocity records in the rover files. The accuracy of the
Differential Correction

velocity measurements can be improved with this option selected.


This option has no effect if there are no velocity records present in any
of the selected rover files. Velocity records from a GeoExplorer I and
II, or GPS Pathfinder Basic Series GPS receiver are not correctable.

28 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Correct Real-time DGPS Positions Select this check box to improve


the accuracy of real-time corrected positions. You can only use data
collected with a Pro XR or Pro XRS system and a data collector that
supports postprocessed real-time positions. The accuracy of the real-
time positions is improved to the same quality as postprocessed
uncorrected positions.
This option has no effect if there are no postprocessed real-time
positions present in any of the selected rover files.
Base Processing Technique You can use these options to improve
results when the base station data is noisy or of unusually low quality.
However it is unlikely that you will need to alter the default setting if
your base station receiver is a recommended Trimble receiver. See
Obtaining Optimal Accuracy, page 230 for a list of these receivers.
Noisy base station data can result from multipath or old and inferior
receiver technology. Consider using a noise reduction technique in the
following situations:
• When the receiver is a 6-channel receiver used to record
synchronized data.
• When the base station data is collected by a Series 4000 receiver
that was not configured to utilize smoothed pseudoranges. The
configuration of the Series 4000 receiver can be verified via the
front panel of the receiver.
• When the base data was obtained in the RINEX format and
converted to the SSF format.
• When multipath is suspected at the base station site.
Differential Correction
You may suspect multipath if differentially corrected rover data
collected by a stationary receiver exhibits a tendency to wander
excessively. For example, rover data collected by a Pro XR or Pro
XRS based system typically does not fluctuate more than one meter.
Rover data collected with any 2, 3, or 6 channel receiver does not tend
to fluctuate more than 2–5 meters.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 283


22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface

Changing the setting can improve your differential correction results


when the base data is of less than optimal quality. If your base data is
of high quality it will not harm your results, however, processing time
will increase.
Table 22.10 shows the options available:
Table 22.10 Base Processing Technique contents

Option Description
Standard Results in standard, epoch by epoch processing.
This is the default option for processing base
station data.
With Filtering Filters the base station data. You can obtain
additional quality control information about the
processing in the base audit file when this option is
checked. The base audit file contains computed
measurement residuals and statistics of rejected
outliers in the data. As a result of using this option,
the corrected positions at the rover site have
smaller standard deviation and produce a better
averaged position. This method is slightly more
time consuming than the standard option.
With Filtering and Filters and smoothes the base station corrections.
Smoothing This is an advanced option used under scenarios
similar to those mentioned above. This method
further reduces the systematic and random errors
in the base station data by additional backward
smoothing of all differential corrections. This
Differential Correction

method is relatively time consuming compared to


the options above. In addition, during processing it
requires approximately 1 MB of disk space per hour
of base station data. The time requirements are
dependent on the speed of your office computer.

28 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22

Zipped Files
This tab contains settings for handling zipped files. It appears as
follows:

Delete Zipped Files after Processing Select this check box to delete
zipped base files once processing is complete. If this option is
selected, only the Zipped files will be deleted.
This option has no effect if the selected base files are not zipped.

Differential Correction
Delete Unzipped Files after Processing Select this check box to
delete unzipped base files once processing is complete. During the
processing the base files will be unzipped.
This option has no effect if the selected base files are zipped.
Overwrite Existing Files when Unzipping Select this check box to
allow existing files of the same name to be overwritten when
unzipping base files. If files of the same name already exist and this
option is not selected, the differential correction process will halt.
This option has no effect if the selected base files are not zipped.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 285


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search

22.5 Internet Search


This section provides additional information on using the Internet
Search functionality. It also gives step-by-step instructions for setting
up an Internet base station provider.

22.5.1 Using Internet Search (First Time)


When you click Internet Search for the first time, the following
dialog appears:

Click No, to view the pre-installed list of Base Providers.


Note – Trimble recommends that you use only the latest list.
Differential Correction

28 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search 22

Click Yes to get the latest list from the Trimble Internet server. The
Confirm Internet Setup dialog appears:

This dialog gives you the opportunity to confirm that your Internet
settings are correct. If you are unsure as to how your Internet settings
are configured, click the Set up Internet Connection button to
configure your Internet settings. For information on setting up your
Internet connection, see Internet Setup, page 288, or see your System
Administrator or Internet Service Provider.
If your Windows Internet settings are correct, and Internet transfers
are working properly, you can permanently turn this dialog off by
selecting the Don't show this message again check box.

Differential Correction
Click Yes to continue.
A list of base providers is downloaded and appears in the Select a Base
Provider dialog.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 287


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search

22.5.2 Internet Setup


The GPS Pathfinder Office software does not install or set up your
Internet connection. It simply uses the Internet facilities built into your
computer’s operating system. It is your responsibility to set up
Windows for your Internet connection.
Trimble is not responsible for setting up your Internet connection, or
for solving any Internet problems that may occur.
For questions or support concerning your Internet connection, please
contact your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP).
There are several steps required to set up Windows for Internet access.
The following is not a full description, but merely a starting point.
Consult the documentation supplied with Windows and by your ISP
for further details.
• You must make sure that the appropriate parts of Windows are
installed. For example, Dial-Up Networking is an optional
component of Windows that is required for dial up connections
to the Internet. Also, Windows 95 Plus! contains the Internet
Jumpstart Kit, which makes it easier to set up access to the
Internet.
• If your organization already has permanent Internet access, then
contact your System Administrator for help to set up your
computer. You will need to set it up for access via a LAN, and
probably for access through a proxy server (also known as a
firewall). Your System Administrator will need to supply the
Differential Correction

address and port of the proxy.


If you will be using a dial-up Internet connection, then you will
need a modem and an account with an Internet Service Provider
(ISP). The ISP will usually give you documentation on how to
set up Windows so that you can dial up and connect to the
Internet through them.
• Once you have this required information, there are two ways of
setting up Windows for Internet access.

28 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search 22

The easiest way is to run the Internet Connection Wizard, by


choosing Start / Programs / Accessories / Internet Tools / Get on
the Internet. If this is not installed, then the other way is to
directly change the settings by double-clicking the Internet icon
in Control Panel.

22.5.3 Select a Base Provider


When you click Yes in the Confirm Internet Setup dialog, the Select a
Base Provider dialog appears:

Providers are sorted by proximity to the rover data, so that base


stations closest to your data collection location appear high in the list.
Select your preferred base provider from the list and click OK. The

Differential Correction
Provider Properties dialog appears.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 289


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search

22.5.4 Provider Properties


When you click OK in the Select a Base Provider dialog, the Provider
Properties dialog appears:

Click OK to accept the settings.


The Internet Search dialog appears:
Differential Correction

Click OK to begin the search with the current settings. The Confirm
Internet Setup dialog appears.

29 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search 22

22.5.5 Performing Internet Search


When you click OK in the Internet Search dialog, the Confirm Internet
Setup dialog appears:

This lets you confirm that your Internet settings are correct. Click Yes
to continue.
The software first checks the base folder of your current project for
any of the files it needs. If the required base data files are found the
Found Local Files dialog appears:

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 291


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search

This dialog gives you the option of continuing with the Internet
search, or using the local files.
If the correct base files are not found locally, or if you selected the
Continue with the Internet Search option in the Found Local Files
dialog, the software proceeds to search in the specified Web site.
The following dialog appears:

The Copying Files from Internet dialog shows the files which need to
be downloaded, and the status of the download operation. When the
download operation is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files
dialog appears.
For more information, see Internet Problems, page 299.
Differential Correction

29 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22

22.6 Troubleshooting
Look for help in one of the following sections:
• If the differential correction failed, see Preventing Failures,
page 293.
• If you need help to evaluate your results, see Evaluating
Corrected Files, page 294.
• If most or all of the data was uncorrected, or the corrected data
was inaccurate, see Reasons for Incomplete or Inaccurate
Correction, page 295.
• If you have problems with connecting to the Internet, see
Internet Problems, page 299.

22.6.1 Preventing Failures


To prevent the failure of your differential correction, edit or
manipulate rover (data) files after differential correction. In particular,
if you carry out any of the following before differentially correcting
the data, adverse effects are likely:
• Permanently Averaging Positions You cannot differentially
correct the output files created using the Positions Only method
in the Grouping utility. This method writes to the output file
only the mean position of each file or group of positions. The
result is a permanent average for each set of positions

Differential Correction
processed. To avoid this, use the Points method to create point
features from each file or group of positions. The difference is
that all the original positions in the file are maintained, and
averaging is done when the point feature is displayed, queried,
or exported to a GIS or CAD format.
Features created using the Points, Lines, and Areas methods in
the Grouping utility can be differentially corrected without
penalty.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 293


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting

• Combining Files A rover file created by combining multiple


rover files with the Combine utility may not be differentially
correctable. If the rover files are not combined chronologically,
or if there are any time overlaps, the data could fail to correct.
To avoid this, differentially correct the multiple files separately
and combine the corrected output files. Multiple rover files can
be corrected in a single step in the Differential Correction
utility.
• Editing Files Rover files cannot be differentially corrected if
certain records are deleted in the SSF Record Editor. For
example, base files cannot be used for differential correction if
navigation or pseudorange measurement data was deleted.

22.6.2 Evaluating Corrected Files


The following errors are removed or almost removed by differential
correction:
• Satellite clock errors are removed by differential correction.
• Atmospheric and ionospheric errors are almost all removed by
differential correction. The shorter the distance between the
base and the rover, the more completely these errors are
removed.
• Satellite orbit prediction errors are almost completely removed
by differential correction. The shorter the distance between the
Differential Correction

base and the rover, the more completely these errors are
removed.
The following errors remain:
• Poor accuracy results due to high PDOP cannot be improved
with differential correction.
• Errors resulting from using excessively weak signals cannot be
removed.

29 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22

• Errors resulting from multipath cannot be removed but can be


minimized by good operating procedures and collecting
multiple positions at a point feature. After differential
correction, the average of these corrected positions minimizes
the error due to multipath. Recording velocity information and
using velocity filtering on the rover file can also help to reduce
multipath error.

22.6.3 Reasons for Incomplete or Inaccurate Correction


Table 22.11 and Table 22.12 list the most common reasons for
incomplete or inaccurate correction and the suggested fixes.
Table 22.11 Differential correction failures

Failure Reason Description Solution


The base and rover The base files must start Use the auto-select option to pick base
files were not recording data before the files automatically. The Confirm Base
recorded rover files start, and must Files dialog will show you which rover
simultaneously. end after the rover files end. files do not overlap base files, and the
Only data collected during start and end times of the files.
the overlapping times can be
corrected.
The rover did not This can happen when Before data collection, make sure that the
use a subset of the elevation masks are set rover elevation mask is greater than the
satellites recorded incorrectly in the base or elevation of obstructions at the base
by the base station. rover, or when the base location. Also increase the rover
station does not have a clear elevation mask by at least 1º for every

Differential Correction
view of the sky. 100 kilometers between the base and
the rover.
The rover file This may be reported by the If corrupt records are reported, run the
contains corrupt Check SSF utility. Check SSF utility and choose to remove
records. the corrupt records. See the Check SSF
online Help for more information.

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 295


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting

Table 22.11 Differential correction failures (Continued)

Failure Reason Description Solution


The base file was Base files need If GPS measurements are not recorded
not recorded in measurement data to the base file cannot be used.
base mode and differentially correct rover
does not contain files.
GPS measurement
data.
The base station The maximum recommended Try a different, closer base file if
and the rover were distance between a GPS available.
too far apart. Pathfinder receiver and a
base station depends on your
elevation masks set in both
receivers, and should never
exceed about 500 km.
The base file If the measurement logging The recommended measurement logging
recorded data at a interval in the base file is interval is between 3 and 5 seconds. It
time interval that greater than 30 seconds, should not exceed 30 seconds. Check
was too large. differential correction may be the logging intervals on the base file.
incomplete.
The base station If the reference position is off Make sure that the hemispheres (N, S, E,
reference position by more than 1000 meters, W) are entered correctly in the base file
was not entered differential correction can fail. Reference Position dialog.
correctly.
Differential Correction

29 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22

Table 22.11 Differential correction failures (Continued)

Failure Reason Description Solution


The office computer Files could not be saved Check the amount of available disk
did not have room causing differential correction space. Delete unnecessary files,
for the files created to fail. particularly old SSF files. If outputting to
during differential a network drive, try using a different
correction. drive.
You performed an A file that was averaged Check that the positions in the files were
operation on the file using the Positions Only not averaged before differential
that makes it unable method in the Grouping and correction. If they were, try differential
to be differentially Averaging utility cannot be correction again using a backup copy of
corrected. differentially corrected. the unaveraged rover files. Check that
Combining multiple files in the files were not combined in the wrong
the wrong order can also time order.
make some of the data
uncorrectable.
You do not know Differential correction failed Check the audit files to determine why
why differential for some unreported reason. differential correction failed.
correction failed.

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 297


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting

Table 22.12 Carrier phase processing failures

Failure Description Solution


Reason
The base The maximum recommended Use different, closer base files if available.
station and distance between a GPS
the rover are Pathfinder receiver and a base
too far apart. station is less than 75 km. In
order to achieve centimeter
accuracy, the distance between
base and rover should be less
than 10 km.
Common The continuous common Collect enough phase data in the field.
observation in observation in the rover and the During the field operation, do not block
rover and base must not be less than 5 satellite signals to the antenna. This
base is too minutes. In order to achieve makes sure that continuous observation is
short. centimeter level accuracy, the maintained. Make sure you use the base
continuous common files that cover the rover file observation.
observations must not be less
than 45 minutes.
Rover and A position solution will be Use the right phase data logging rate at
Base have generated at the rate of the least both the rover and the base.
different common multiple of base and
phase data rover phase data logging rates.
logging rate. For example, if the rover phase
and position logging interval is 3
seconds and the logging interval
at the base is 5 seconds, a
Differential Correction

position fix will be made every 15


seconds. Due to this fact, some
positions at the rover may not be
corrected while some are
corrected.
Noisy data. Too many cycle slips and a signal During the field operation, try to avoid
to noise ratio (SNR) being too low blocking the satellite signals and stay as
may cause the rover position to far as possible from reflective objects.
be uncorrectable or of a low
accuracy.

29 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22

22.6.4 Internet Problems


A helpful rule for solving Internet searching problems: If Internet
Explorer works, then the Internet Search in the Differential Correction
utility will also work.
Specifically, if Internet Explorer can access and download base files
from your chosen Internet base data provider, then this establishes that
Windows is set up correctly to work with the Internet.
Internet Explorer uses the Windows settings—as does the Differential
Correction utility. Some other browsers, such as Netscape, do not use
the Windows settings—but use their own settings instead. Using a
browser other than Internet Explorer does not help with
troubleshooting Differential Correction problems.
If Internet Explorer cannot download the base files, then there is a
problem with your Windows setup. Trimble is not responsible for
setting up your Internet connection, or for solving any Internet
problems that may occur. You may need help from your System
Administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to resolve the
problem.
Note – After changing the Windows Internet settings, you must close
and restart Differential Correction for the changes to take effect.

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 299


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting

Table 22.13 lists possible causes and solutions for problems relating to
Internet connections.
Table 22.13 Internet correction failures

Symptom Cause Fix


You can’t find a local Your base data provider Create a new provider, and choose the "Copy
Internet base data list is not up to date. the latest list from the Trimble Internet site,
provider in the list. and select from it" option.
Even the latest list does Create a new provider, and choose the radio
not contain a local button that lets you enter the details yourself.
provider that you are You may need to contact the local provider to
aware of. ask for some of the important details.
You cannot connect Windows’ Internet Check the Windows Internet settings (via the
to the Internet. A configuration is not set Internet icon in Control Panel). Try using
time-out error up correctly. Perhaps Internet Explorer to determine whether it can
occurs, or it fails to your modem is not access and download the base files. Contact
dial up the ISP. installed correctly, or your System Administrator or ISP for further
Dial Up Networking is assistance.
not set up correctly.
Differential Correction

30 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22

Table 22.13 Internet correction failures (Continued)

Symptom Cause Fix


Failure to dial into the Your ISP may be busy Try again, either immediately or later.
ISP. with other customers, Consider changing to an ISP that has more
leaving no spare lines lines.
free.
Failure to copy files This is a general The file may not exist because it is too old.
from the Internet Internet error code. The Most base providers only keep one to three
(error code 500 or most likely causes are months of data online before archiving. The
550). that the file or directory file may not exist if it is outside the hours
does not exist on the logged by the server. For example, some
server, or that the server base stations only log data for normal
was not found. working hours. Also, the base station may
have been put out of service during the
required time period.
It is possible that the specified directory is
incorrect, perhaps because the provider has
changed the server configuration.
If you entered the Base Provider details
yourself, check that the server address is
correct. Also check that the proxy server is
set up correctly. In most cases, you can use
Internet Explorer to double-check the
required URL (Internet address). If
necessary, contact the base data provider.
Your Internet The Internet server is Try again, either immediately or later.
connection is very very busy, or your ISP is
slow. busy, or the line is noisy.

Differential Correction

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 301


22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting
Differential Correction

30 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

23
23 GPS Pathfinder Office
Utilities
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ The Batch Processor utility
■ View menu
■ Grouping utility
■ Combine utility
■ SSF Record Editor
■ Check SSF files
■ SSF to RINEX utility
■ Text Conversion utility
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Introduction

23.1 Introduction
The utilities documented in this chapter are produced by Trimble
Navigation Limited for processing field data. They run under
Windows 95 and higher (some smaller utilities run under MS-DOS)
and work with the SSF format files created by Trimble data collectors.
These utilities are installed as a part of GPS Pathfinder Office. See the
Installation chapter in the GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started
Guide for installation instructions.
Utilities

30 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

23.2 The Batch Processor Utility


The Batch Processor utility is designed by Trimble Navigation
Limited to automate repetitive tasks that must be performed after you
have collected field data. You can set up the Batch Processor utility to:
• download data files from your data collector
• differentially correct your files
• format your files for your particular GIS system
• import and process your files with your GIS software,
depending on the power of its own batch or macro language
You can save your settings as a batch setup to use in future sessions. A
batch setup will store information about, and specific settings for, the
Data Transfer, Differential Correction, Export, and User Command
functions you select. It will also associate a particular project with a
batch setup.
Note – Any settings you change will be saved only in that named batch
setup.
The Batch Processor utility is also closely linked to the Connection
Manager utility. You can set up the Connection Manager utility to
automatically detect and download data files from a connected data
collector, and then run a batch setup automatically. For more
information, see Chapter 13, The Connection Manager Utility.
The Batch Processor utility is part of the GPS Pathfinder Office
software.

23.2.1 Starting the Batch Processor Utility


Before you can start the Batch Processor utility, Microsoft Windows
must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office
software must be installed. Start the Batch Processor utility from
within the GPS Pathfinder Office software, or directly from Windows.
To start the Batch Processor utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office
software, do one of the following:
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 305


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

• Click the Batch Processor utility icon .


• Select Utilities / Batch Processor from the menu bar, as shown:

To start the Batch Processor utility from Windows:


• Select Programs / Pathfinder Office <version> / Batch
Processor.
Utilities

30 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

The Batch Setup window appears.

23.2.2 Using the Batch Processor Utility


When you create a new batch setup, firstly you name the setup then
move through a series of screens where you specify settings for each
task. To modify the properties of an existing setup, choose from a list
of existing setups, then move through the screens to change settings.
Finally, start the processing. The following steps explain what to do
for all available tasks. Click Next to go to the screen for the next task
you selected. Click Finish when you have set all the tasks you need
for the batch setup.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 307


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Note – Any setup you create without using the Data Transfer utility
will not be shown in the available list of batch setups for use with the
Connection Manager utility.
If you choose to manually select data files as input for the batch
process, the Batch Processor utility will pause to let you do this. For
more information see Select Input Files Manually, page 327.
If you choose to select base files manually for differential correction,
the Batch Processor utility will pause to let you do this. For more
information see Step 3: Setting Up Differential Correction, page 313.
Information on how to use the Batch Processor utility is described in
the following sections.

Batch Processor Log Window


When a batch session is in progress, a window displays a log file
which is updated as each different part of the session runs. You can
refer to this file once the batch session has finished to confirm that
everything was processed as expected. If problems occurred during
batch processing, they will be described here. For more information
see Batch Processor Log Window, page 345.
Utilities

30 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

23.2.3 Step 1: Using a Batch Setup


Start the Batch Processor utility. The following dialog appears:

If this is the first time you have used the Batch Processor utility, there
are two default files available to view.
• Sample file processing setup has manual data selection,
Differential Correction, and Export selected, as shown in the
dialog above.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 309


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

• Sample file transfer setup has Data Transfer selected, as shown


in the following dialog:

Otherwise the default setup is the last batch setup chosen.


The summary list shown in the dialogs details the steps of the
batch process for the selected batch setup. See below for an
explanation of the items in the summary lists.

Uses data files that you select manually from a file


folder once the Batch Processor utility is run.
Uses data files that are transferred automatically from
your data collector or selected manually from your data
collector once the Batch Processor utility is run
For more information see Step 2: Setting Up Data
Transfer, page 312.
Utilities

31 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Differentially corrects files using base files from a local


source, Internet source, or that you select manually.
For more information see Step 3: Setting Up
Differential Correction, page 313.
Exports corrected files using a selected export setup.
For more information see Step 4: Setting Up Export,
page 315.
If User Command is selected in the batch setup, the following
icon appears in the summary list:
Starts a selected program, command or batch file once
all other processing has finished.
For more information see Step 5: Setting Up a User
Command, page 316.

Use this dialog to:


• Choose an existing batch setup
• Create a new batch setup
• Modify the properties of an existing batch setup
• Delete a batch setup
When you have finished setting up all the tasks for the batch setup,
click Finish on the final dialog, for example Export, or
User Command, to return to the main Batch Setup dialog.
Then do one of the following:
• To save and run your batch setup, click Run.
• To save your batch setup and leave the Batch Processor utility
without running it, click Close. The setup dialog disappears and
you then need to exit the Batch Processor utility window.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 311


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

23.2.4 Step 2: Setting Up Data Transfer


If you include Data Transfer in the batch setup, the following dialog
appears:

The Device window displays the data collector you have connected to
your computer for transfer of data files.
1. Select one of the following options:
– Transfer all files – transfer all files from your data
collector.
– Transfer new and updated files – transfer only new or
updated files from your data collector.
– Select files manually.
2. Click Next to continue.
Note – If you do not select Data Transfer, you need to select input files
manually once you run the Batch Processor utility. For more
information, see Select Input Files Manually, page 327.
Utilities

31 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

23.2.5 Step 3: Setting Up Differential Correction


If you include Differential Correction in the batch setup, the
following dialog appears:

1. Select one of the following options:


– Local Search for base files – automatically select base files
from the base file folder of the project associated with the
current batch setup.
– Internet Search for base files – automatically select base
files according to your Internet connection settings. For
more information on Internet settings, see Using Internet
Search, page 242.
– Select files manually – select base files once you run the
Batch Processor utility.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 313


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

2. Click Settings. The Differential Correction Options dialog


appears.

3. Select the appropriate settings.


4. Click Advanced. The Differential Correction Settings Dialog
appears.
Utilities

31 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

5. Select the appropriate settings.


6. Click OK in the Settings and Options dialogs to save any
changes.
7. Click Next to continue.

23.2.6 Step 4: Setting Up Export


If you select Export for inclusion in the batch setup, the following
dialog appears:

By default, the last-used export setup is selected.


Use this dialog to:
• create a new export setup
• modify the properties of an existing export setup
• delete an export setup
Click Next to continue or Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 315


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

23.2.7 Step 5: Setting Up a User Command


If you select User Command in the batch setup, the following dialog
appears:

To set up a user command, do one of the following:


• Type in a user command
• Click Browse and navigate folders to select a user command.
• Click Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog.

B Tip – The file created in your settings configuration folder, typically


\Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\PFOffice\Config\Expfiles.txt, is
created every time files are exported using the Batch Processor utility, or
exported manually using the Export utility. The first line of the file contains
the directory to which the files were exported, and the following lines list
the names of the exported files. If you are creating a macro or batch file to
be run as a user command, you may want it to parse Expfiles.txt to
determine which files are to be processed each time.
Utilities

31 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

23.2.8 Exiting the Batch Processor Utility


Once you have run the Batch Processor utility, or closed the setup
dialog, you need to exit the Batch Processor utility.
To exit the Batch Processor utility:
• In the Batch Processor window, select File / Exit
Note – The log file created during a batch session is not automatically
saved when you exit the Batch Processor utility. If you want a
permanent copy of the log file:
1. Select File / Save As.
2. Specify the filename and path where the log file is to be stored.
For more information, see Batch Processor Log Window, page 345.

23.2.9 The Batch Processor Utility Interface


This section contains a field-by-field description of the Batch
Processor utility interface. Use this section as a reference to the Batch
Processor utility.
• Data Transfer
• Differential Correction
• Export
• User Command

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 317


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Choose an Existing Batch Setup

To choose an existing setup:


1. Click the drop-down arrow and choose a setup from the list.
2. Click Run.
Utilities

31 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Create a New Batch Setup

1. To create a new setup, click New. The following dialog appears:

2. In the Create group, do one of the following:


– To create a new batch setup, select the New setup option.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 319


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

– To create a copy of an existing setup, select the Copy of


existing setup option and then select a batch setup from the
list. The name of your batch setup will appear in the Setup
name window at the top of the dialog as Copy of < batch
setup name>. You can highlight the name and change it.

3. Click OK. The Overview dialog appears.

4. Select your settings. For more information, see Overview


Dialog, page 321.
5. Click Next to continue.
Utilities

32 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Overview Dialog

Functions group
Select the following check boxes as required:
• Data Transfer – transfer files from a data collector.
• Differential Correction – differentially correct data files using
base files from a local search, Internet search, or files that you
select manually.
• Export – export corrected files using a sample export or one that
you create.
• User Command – run another Windows or DOS program,
command, or batch file once all other processes have stopped.
Tasks are performed in order, from top to bottom.

Project group
Select the following check boxes as required:
• Current project – selected by default.
• Selected project
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 321


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

To open a different project:


1. In the Project group, choose Selected project.
2. Click the drop-down arrow and choose a project from the list.
The project you choose and its associated batch setup determine
where export files will go.
3. Select the Allow files to be overwritten check box.
If you select this check box, the software overwrites existing
files with the same name in the batch session. This includes
transferred data collector files, differentially corrected files, and
GIS and CAD format files.
The box is selected by default because the batch session will
stop if it encounters a file that would otherwise be overwritten.
Utilities

32 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Modify the Properties of an Existing Batch Setup

To modify the properties of an existing batch setup:


1. Click the drop down arrow and choose a batch setup from the
list.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 323


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

2. Click Properties. The following dialog appears.

3. Select your settings in the Overview dialog.


4. Click Next to continue.
Utilities

32 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Delete a Batch Setup

To delete an existing batch setup:


1. Click the drop-down arrow and choose a batch setup from the
list.
2. Click Delete.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 325


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

23.2.10 Data Transfer


Include the Data Transfer option if you want to transfer files from a
data collector.

The Device window displays the data collector you have connected to
your computer for data transfer.
Select one of the following options:

Choose... to...
Transfer all files transfer all files from your data collector to your
office computer.
Transfer new and transfer only new and updated files from your data
updated files collector to your office computer.
Select files manually select files manually once you run the Batch
Processor utility. For more information see Select
input files manually.
Utilities

32 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Select Input Files Manually


If you chose to select input files manually in the batch setup, once you
click Run in the Batch Setup window the following dialog appears:

1. Click the drop-down arrow and browse through the available


folders.
2. Select one or more files from the list of filenames.
3. When the desired files are selected, click Open.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 327


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Differential Correction

To differentially correct data files using base files from a local search,
Internet search, or files you select manually:
1. Select one of the following options:

Choose... to...
Local Search automatically select base files from the base file
for base files folder of the project associated with the current
batch setup.
Internet Search automatically select files according to your Internet
for base files connection settings. For more information on
Internet settings see Internet Search in the
Differential Correction Help.
Select files select base files once the Batch Processor utility is
manually run

2. Click Settings to display the Differential Correction Options


dialog.
Utilities

32 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Differential Correction Options Dialog

Processing group Table 23.1 shows the available options.

Table 23.1 Processing group options

Option... Description
Smart Code and Rover files will be differentially corrected first. Any
Carrier Phase files with carrier data will then be processed for
Processing carrier phase correction. This is the default setting.
Code Processing only Rover files will be differentially corrected only,
regardless of the content of the data files.
Carrier Phase Rover files will be carrier phase processed only.
Processing only

Corrected files group Differentially corrected files are given the


filename extension .cor by default. If you want a different filename
extension, type it into the File Extension window.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 329


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Reference Position group Select one of the following options:

Choose... to...
From base files use the reference position from locally selected or
Internet selected base files (which is unknown until
the base files are actually selected).
Check same as last use the reference position selected in the last-used
session batch setup.

Note – If the reference positions in all base files do not match, an error
will occur and the Batch Processor utility will stop.
Click Advanced to display the Differential Correction Settings dialog.

23.2.11 Differential Correction Settings Dialog

Output tab The tab appears as follows:


Utilities

33 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

The fields in this tab are described in the following sections.


Output Positions group Select one of the following options:

Choose... to...
Corrected Only output only corrected positions and velocities
records.
Corrected and output both corrected and uncorrected positions
Uncorrected and velocities records.

Audit File group Specify what you want written to the audit files. If
differential correction is unsuccessful, you can use these files to help
determine why. Select one of the following options:

Choose... to...
None produce no audit file.
Standard produce a standard audit file showing basic
information about the differential correction
session.
Expanded produce an expanded file showing step-by-step
information about the differential correction
session.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 331


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Base Options tab The tab appears as follows:

The fields in this tab are described in the following sections.


Reference Confirmation group Select one of the following options:

Choose... to...
Always Required always display the reference position dialog after
selecting base files.
Not Required if display the reference position dialog only if the
Identical to Previous reference position in all selected base files is not
Session the same as that used in the previous session.
Utilities

33 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Filter Minimums group Select one of the following options:

Choose... to...
Elevation filter out any data from satellites below the specified
height above the horizon.

Note – A value of 0 indicates no positions will


be filtered out.
SNR filter out any data from satellites with a low signal to
noise ratio.

Note – A value of 0 indicates no positions will


be filtered out.

Code Processing tab This tab appears as follows:

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 333


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

The fields in this tab are described in the following sections.


Rover Processing group
• Rover Processing Technique Select one of the following
options.

Choose... to...
Standard standard step-by-step processing.
With Velocity Filtering smooth out any large leaps or spikes in
velocity data recorded when mobile and in a
multipath environment.
Check Velocity differentially correct any velocity records in
Records check box rover files.
Correct Real-time improve the accuracy of real-time corrected
DGPS Positions check positions.
box

• Base Processing Technique group Select settings in this


group to improve results when the base station data is noisy or
of unusually low quality. Select one of the following options.

Choose... to...
Standard standard step-by-step processing.
With Filtering filter base station data, and provide
additional information for the base audit file.
With Filtering and filter and smooth base station data.
Smoothing
Utilities

33 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Zipped Files tab This tab appears as follows:

Select one of the following options.

Choose... to...
Delete Zipped files only zipped files are deleted. Has no effect on
after processing selected base files that are not zipped.
Delete Unzipped files only unzipped base files are deleted. During
after processing processing, base files are unzipped. Has no effect
on selected base files that are zipped.
Overwrite existing files allow existing files of the same name to be
when unzipping overwritten when unzipping base files. Has no effect
if the selected base files are not zipped. The box is
selected by default because the batch session will
stop if it encounters a file that would otherwise be
overwritten.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 335


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Select base files manually


If you chose to select base files manually in the batch setup, once you
click Run in the Batch Setup window the following dialog appears.
Note – If you also chose to select input files manually, the Select Files
to Process dialog appears before the Select Base Files dialog.

1. Click the drop-down arrow and browse through the available


folders.
2. Select one or more files from the list of filenames.
3. When the desired files are selected, click Open.
Utilities

33 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Export
Export corrected files using a sample export setup, or one that you
create.

To use an export setup, do one of the following:


• Click New to create your own export setup.
• Click Modify to modify the properties of an existing export
setup.
• Click Delete to delete an export setup.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 337


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Create a New Export Setup

To create a new export setup:


1. Click New in the Export Setup group to display the New setup
dialog.

2. In the Create group, do one of the following:


– Select the New setup option and then click the drop-down
arrow. Select a named setup from the list. The name of
your new setup will appear in the Setup Name window at
the top of the dialog as New <selected setup name>. Click
OK to display the Export Setup dialog.
Utilities

33 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

– Select the Copy of existing setup option and then click the
drop-down arrow. Select a named setup from the list. The
name of your new setup will appear in the Setup Name
window at the top of the dialog as Copy of <selected setup
name>. You can highlight the name and change it. Click
OK to display the Export Setup dialog.

Export Setup dialog

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 339


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

To configure the export settings:


1. Select each tab in turn and specify the settings that you need. If
the selected format has other properties that you need to set, an
extra tab appears. This tab contains controls for selecting
options that are specific to this format, as shown in Table 23.2.
Table 23.2 Extra Export Settings tab

Format Tab
ArcView Shapefile Shape Options Tab
AutoCAD DXF DXF Options Tab
Configurable ASCII ASCII Options Tab
DBASE DBASE Options Tab
Microstation DGN DGN Options Tab

2. Click OK to return to the Export dialog.


Utilities

34 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Modify the properties of an existing export setup

To change the export setup or the export directory:


1. In the Export Setup group, click Modify to display the Export
Setup dialog.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 341


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Delete an Export Setup

To delete an existing export setup:


1. Click the drop-down arrow and select a named export setup
from the list.
2. Click Delete.
Utilities

34 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

User command
Use this command to run another Windows or DOS program,
command, or batch file once all other processes have stopped.

Use this dialog to:


• Type in a User Command
• Browse folders for a User Command
To type in a user command:
1. In the Command Line field, type the path and filename of the
program, command, or batch file that you want to run after all
other processes have stopped.
2. Click Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog. Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 343


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

To Browse folders for a User Command from a list of programs or


files:
1. Click Browse to select the program or filename from the Select
Program dialog, as shown below:

2. Select a program or file from the list of filenames.


Utilities

34 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

3. Click Open to confirm your selection and return to the Batch


Setup Properties dialog. The selected program file appears in
the Command Line field.

4. Click Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog.

Batch Processor Log Window


This section describes the Batch Processor Log window.
When you run a batch setup or a batch setup is started by the
Connection Manager utility, the following window appears:

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 345


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

When a batch operation is in progress, this window contains a log of


the sequence of events in the batch session. As each different part of
the session runs, the log file is updated. Refer to this log file once the
batch session has finished to confirm that everything was processed as
expected. If problems occurred during batch processing, they are
described here.
There are two levels of detail that can be displayed in the log window:
• The summary level shows key processes and results for the
session. This level is adequate for most batch processing
sessions.
• The detail level shows the summary level detail plus additional
parameters used during the processing. If problems occurred
during batch processing, it may be necessary to view the
information in this level to determine what went wrong.
Use the View / Show Summary and View / Show Details menu
commands to switch between these two levels of detail.
The log window can also display the time at which each task was
carried out during the batch session. Use the View / Show Times
command to switch times on and off.
Note – The log file created during a batch session is not automatically
saved when you exit the Batch Processor utility.
The contents of the log window can be saved to a file or copied to the
clipboard for pasting into another application. Select File / Save Log
As to save the log to a file, or File / Copy log to clipboard to copy the
contents of the log to the clipboard. The saved or copied information
will reflect the current level of detail and times being displayed.
Utilities

34 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

The following sections describe each component of the window.


Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for convenient access to frequently
used operations. Most of the tools have an equivalent accelerator key
for keyboard users.
Table 23.3 shows the keyboard and menu equivalents of the tools.
Table 23.3 Keyboard and Menu Equivalents of Tools

Tool Button Keyboard Menu


Run [Ctrl] + [R] File / Run

Stop [Ctrl] + [S] File / Stop

Batch Setup [Ctrl] + [B] File / Batch Setup

Print Log [Ctrl] + [P] File / Print

Save Log As [Ctrl] + [A] File / Save Log As

Copy log to [Ctrl] + [C] File / Copy log to


clipboard clipboard
Show Summary [Ctrl] + [U] View / Show Summary

Show Details [Ctrl] + [D] View / Show Details

Show Times [Ctrl] + [I] View / Show Times

B Tip – If you are not sure what a button on the toolbar does, briefly hold the
mouse pointer over the button. A Tool Tip appears next to the button,
describing the command it represents. The status bar also changes to
show a more detailed description of the command.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 347


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the window:

On the left, the message For Help, press [F1] is usually displayed. This
changes as you move the cursor over a menu command, or hold the
mouse pointer over a button on the toolbar, to give a one-line
description of the command, as shown above.
On the right, the name of the current batch setup is displayed. This
area is sometimes called the system tray.

23.2.12 File Menu


This section describes the commands in the File menu.
Batch Setup Select this command to set the parameters for a batch
setup. This takes you through the process of setting up and running a
batch session. See Using the Batch Processor Utility, page 307, for a
step-by-step description of the Batch Setup process.
The Batch Setup dialog appears automatically when the Batch
Processor utility is started. By default, it displays the last-used named
batch setup.
Run Select this command or click the Run tool to start a batch
processing session using the settings in the current named batch setup.
Stop Select this command or click the Stop tool to stop a batch session
while it is running. The session will halt immediately.
Utilities

34 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Save Log As Select this command or click the Save As tool to save
the currently displayed log to a file. The following dialog appears:

Type in a name for the log file and click Save.


Copy Log to Clipboard Select this command to copy the batch log to
the clipboard. You can then paste the log into another Windows
application such as a text editor.
Alternatively, you can save the log directly to a file with the File /
Save Log As command, and open it with another Windows application
such as a text editor.
Set Printer Font Select this command to set the font used by the
printer to print the log.
Print Log On Completion Select this command to print the log at the
completion of the batch process.
Print Select this command or click the Print tool to print the log.
Exit Select his command to exit the Batch Processor utility.
Note – The batch log is not automatically saved when you exit the
Batch Processor utility. Select File / Save Log As to save the log to a
file, or File / Copy log to clipboard to copy the log to the clipboard.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 349


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

23.2.13 View Menu


Use this menu to hide or show the Toolbar, Status Bar and the
following items:
Show Summary Select this command click on the Show Summary
tool to display a summary of the batch log. As each step in the batch
session finishes, the result is displayed in the log. Only the most
important commands and results are displayed. An example of a
summary log is shown below.
Utilities

35 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Show Details Select this command or click on the Show Details tool
to display the batch log in detail. As each step in the batch session
finishes, the result is displayed in the log. An example of a detailed log
is shown below:

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 351


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility

Show Times Select this command or click on the Show Times tool to
display time information in the log. The time is shown for each
command, error, or result that occurs in the batch session. An example
of a log that includes time information is shown below:

23.2.14 Help Menu


This section describes the controls in the Help menu.
The Help menu provides access to the Batch Processor utility Help
commands, as well as to the standard About Batch Processor utility
window.
Contents Select this command and the Contents page of the help file
appears.
Utilities

35 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23

Search for Help On When you select this command, the following
dialog appears:

To display information for a specific topic, type in a word or select an


index entry. Click Display to see the selected help topic.
Using Help Select this command to display the standard Microsoft
Windows How to Use Help information.
About The Batch Processor utility Select this command to display
the About Batch Processor dialog. This dialog displays the Batch
Processor utility software version number as well as copyright and
licensing information.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 353


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

23.3 Grouping Utility


If your data collector does not support data dictionaries, or for some
reason you do not want to work with a data dictionary, the Grouping
utility provides you with a way of grouping a series of GPS positions
into features that can be recognized by GPS Pathfinder Office. The
Grouping utility scans a set of data files that were collected without a
data dictionary, and creates a new data file composed of features.
Topics in this section include:
• When to use the Grouping utility
• Starting the Grouping utility
• Using the Grouping utility
• Exiting the Grouping utility
• A description of the Grouping utility main window

23.3.1 When to Use the Grouping Utility


If your data collector does not support data dictionaries, or if for some
reason you do not want to work with a data dictionary, the Grouping
utility provides you with a way of grouping GPS positions into
features that can be recognized by GPS Pathfinder Office. You can
also use it to convert Not In Feature GPS positions into features.
The Grouping utility scans a set of data files and creates a new data
file composed of features. Although the data is usually collected
without a data dictionary and therefore contains no features, data in
files that contain features can be grouped.
You must collect data for this utility using one of the following
methods:
• Multi-file method Collect each feature in a separate data file.
Make a careful note on paper of which feature is in which file. It
is recommended that files have a different prefix to distinguish
points, lines, and areas.
Utilities

35 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23

• One-file method Collect all features into a single file, leaving a


distinct time break between each. An ideal time break is about
half a minute or longer. This may result naturally, if you take a
while to get from one feature to the next, or you may have to
wait between features. If the time break is too short, you may
not be able to distinguish it from breaks in the data file caused
by too few satellites or high PDOP situations.
You must have features of only one type in one file. Separate point,
line, and area features into separate files. When you group each file
back in the office, you will have to group points, lines, and areas
separately.
You can process several files created by this method in one grouping
session.
All features created with the Grouping utility are real features; they
can be displayed, edited, queried, and exported as if created with a
data dictionary. It is recommended that you differentially correct the
data before using this utility, although most features created with the
Grouping utility can be differentially corrected.
Data files created by the Grouping utility have an automatically
generated data dictionary. The list of features is as follows:
• Point_generic
• Line_generic
• Area_generic
Each feature type has a text attribute called “Comment”. This attribute
details the source file and creation method of the feature. Using notes
taken in the field during data collection, edit this attribute to indicate
what the feature really represents.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 355


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

23.3.2 Starting the Grouping Utility


Before you can start the Grouping utility, Microsoft Windows must be
running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software
must be installed. Start the Grouping utility from within GPS
Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Grouping utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Grouping from the menu bar.
To start the Grouping utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> /
Grouping.
The main window of the Grouping utility appears:
Utilities

35 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23

23.3.3 Using the Grouping Utility


This section provides you with a step-by-step explanation of how to
use the Grouping utility.
To group raw GPS positions into features:
1. Select the input files. By default, the last-used set of files is
selected for processing. For example, if you had just
differentially corrected a set of data files the corrected files
would be selected by default.
If you want to change the list of selected input files, click
Browse. The Select Data Files dialog appears:

The selected data files are highlighted in the File name field.
There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
– Replace the list by clicking on a single file.
– Add or remove individual files from the list by holding
down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 357


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

– Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and


selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up
to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
Note – The data files you select must all contain features of the
same type: points, lines, or areas. You can only create one file,
containing features of one type, in one Grouping session.
2. Specifying a sort option is relevant only when multiple input
files are selected. The sort option selected determines the order
in which the input files are processed and the unique identifier
associated with each resultant group of positions. Select the
Chronologically option to process files based on start times,
with earlier files processed first. This is the default. Select the
Alphabetically option to process files using the name of each
file to determine processing order. The files are processed in
alphabetical order from A to Z, followed by numeric values for
files named with a numeric value as their first character.
3. Specify the output file. By default, the output file is called
grouped.ssf and will be created in the current project folder.
If you want to change the file name click Output File. The
following dialog appears:
Utilities

35 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23

Enter the new file name in the File name field. Select a different
folder if necessary. Click Save to confirm your selection and
return to the main Grouping window. The new file name is
displayed in the Output File field.
4. Select a grouping method from the Grouping Method field.
Select the One group per input file option to create one feature
from each input file. This is the multi-file method described in
When to Use the Grouping Utility, page 354.
Select the Create groups separated by option to create features
separated by a specified time break. You should enter a time in
the Minimum time break field that is approximately the time
that elapsed between collecting features. This is the one-file
method described in When to Use the Grouping Utility,
page 354.
5. Select the feature type to create in the Create Feature Type
field.
6. Click OK to group the files.
If you selected Create groups separated by (plus some
minimum time break) in the Grouping Method field, then the
following dialog appears:

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 359


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

This dialog displays the groups that have been created. For
more information see Confirm Groups Dialog, page 365.
7. Check that each group represents a feature.
If more than one feature is included in one group, you may need
to repeat the grouping with a larger time break. Click Cancel to
close the dialog. Specify a larger minimum time break, then
group the data again.
Combine any groups that represent the same feature, and
exclude any groups that you do not want. (You cannot combine
groups across files.)
8. Click OK to accept the groups and create the output file.
A status bar appears and the operation begins. When it is
complete, the following message appears:

9. Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Grouping utility


closes.

23.3.4 Exiting the Grouping Utility


The Grouping utility closes automatically when an operation is
successfully completed. If an error occurred, you can exit the program
manually.
To exit the Grouping utility:
• Click Cancel. The Grouping utility closes.
Utilities

36 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23

23.3.5 Grouping Utility Main Window


This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the
Grouping utility.
When you start the Grouping utility the following window appears:

The fields and buttons in the Grouping dialog are described in the
following sections.
Input Files This group contains the controls for selecting files for
processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the
Selected Files list are stored. By default, this points to the current GPS
Pathfinder Office project folder.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 361


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

The Selected Files window lists the files that have been selected for
processing in the current session. By default, the last-used set of files
are selected as input files. For example, if you had just differentially
corrected a set of data files the corrected files would appear in this list
by default.
The Browse button lets you change the list of selected input files.
When you click it, the Select Data Files dialog appears:

The selected data files are highlighted in the File name field. There are
several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting
the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including
that file will be selected or deselected.
Note – The data files you select must all contain features of the same
type: points, lines, or areas. You can create only one file, containing
features of one type, in one Grouping session.
Utilities

36 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23

Click Open to accept the highlighted files and return to the main
window of the Grouping utility.
Sort Specify a sort option only when multiple input files are selected.
The sort option selected determines the order in which the input files
are processed and the unique identifier associated with each resultant
group of positions. Select Chronologically to process files based on
start times, with earlier files processed first. This is the default. Select
Alphabetically to process files using the name of each file to
determine processing order. The files are processed in alphabetical
order from A to Z, followed by numeric values for files named with a
numeric value as their first character.
Output File This field displays the file name that will be created from
the grouping and averaging operation. By default, the output file is
called grouped.ssf and will be created in the current GPS Pathfinder
Office project folder. Click Output File to change the file name. The
following dialog appears:

Enter the new file name in the File Name field. Select a different
folder if necessary. Click Save to confirm your selection and return to
the main window of the Grouping utility. The new file name is
displayed in the Output File field.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 363


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

Grouping Method This options let you select the method for
processing the input files. Table 23.4 shows the two options available:
Table 23.4 Grouping Method options

Option Description
One group per input file Creates one group from each input file. You can
turn each group into a feature of the type you
specified.
Create groups Creates groups separated by time intervals. The
separated by time interval must be greater than the value in the
Minimum time break field.

Minimum time break Enter a time in the Minimum time break field
that is approximately the time that elapsed between collecting
features.
Create Feature Type This field allows you to select the feature type
that will be created from the input files. Table 23.5 shows the options
available:
Table 23.5 Create Feature Type options

Option Description
Points Creates point features.
Lines Creates line features.
Areas Creates area features.
Positions Only Creates averaged positions instead of features. A
single position will be created per input file, or per
time-separated group. Note that the positions
created by this option cannot be differentially
corrected.

Click OK to begin a grouping operation. If the Create groups


separated by option is selected, the Confirm Groups dialog appears. If
not, grouping commences immediately.
Utilities

36 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23

Click Cancel to exit the Grouping utility. Any changes made will not
be saved.
Click Help to access the on-line help system of the Grouping utility.

Confirm Groups Dialog


If you chose the grouping method that involves a minimum time
break, the following dialog appears:

The beginning of a new file is marked by a dashed line with a path and
file name. An already existing feature also appears as a dashed line
with the feature classification, for example ‘point feature’.
Each of the other lines in the box represents a group. A group is a set
of positions. A group is a feature, if you did not select Positions Only
in the Grouping window.
Use this dialog to check that each group represents only one feature.
You can combine groups, exclude unwanted groups, or return to the
main window and carry out the grouping again with different settings.
The columns in this dialog vary depending on the feature type you
chose.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 365


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

Minimum Time Break This field displays the time break that you
specified. If it is too small or if there were some very long gaps
between GPS positions that caused unwanted time breaks in the input
files, some features may span more than one group. If it is too large,
more than one feature may be included in one group. To alter the value
in this field, return to the main window and edit the Minimum time
break field.
Group This column numbers the groups in sequence. Parentheses
around a group number indicate that the group has been excluded. If a
group is combined, the column shows the numbers of both groups,
separated by a comma or two dots.
Positions Use this column to check that each group has the correct
number of positions. For example, if you collected 100 positions for
each feature, make sure that the value for each group is 100.
Time Break This column indicates the time interval between the last
position of this group and the first position in the next group. Make
sure that the time break between each group is consistent with what
you collected in the field. Remember that gaps are created when there
are too few satellites or when there are high PDOP situations. If no
value is displayed, there is no following group. This occurs, for
example, at the end of a file or before an already existing feature.
Gap For point and line features, this column indicates the distance
between the last position in this group and the first position in the next
group. If no value is displayed, there is no following group. This
occurs, for example, at the end of a file or before an already existing
feature.
Make sure that the value for each group is consistent with what you
collected in the field. For example, if each feature was a long distance
apart, then a small value probably means that this group should be
combined with the next group to make a single feature.
Utilities

36 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23

Std Dev For point features, this column indicates the spread of
positions within each group. Values are more accurate if the input files
have been differentially corrected first. A group with a very large
spread probably indicates that two or more features are combined in
this group and that a smaller time interval needs to be specified. Note
that if the file has not been differentially corrected, the spread for a
single point feature may be up to 100 meters.
Standard deviation is not a measure of the accuracy of a point feature.
It indicates the spread of positions that make up that feature and bears
no relation to the absolute accuracy of these positions.
Length For line features, this column indicates the length of the line
of positions in each group. Make sure that the value for each group is
consistent with what was collected in the field.
Perimeter For area features, this column indicates the perimeter of the
area formed from each group. Make sure that the value for each group
is consistent with what was collected in the field.
Area For area features, this column indicates the area of the feature
created from the positions in each group. Make sure that the value for
each group is consistent with what was collected in the field.
Click Cancel to return to the main window of the Grouping utility. Do
this if you need to specify a different time break, for example.
Combine To combine a group with the following group, highlight the
group and click Combine. You can combine a group with a combined
group. Groups cannot be combined across files or across existing
features within a file.
Click Separate to separate the selected combined groups.
Click Exclude to exclude the highlighted group from the output file.
You may want to exclude a group if it was a repeated feature or a
mistake. Combined groups can be excluded. An excluded group is
indicated by parentheses around the Group value. You cannot exclude
file boundary entries or existing features within a file.
Click Include to include a previously excluded group.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 367


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility

Click OK to accept the groups and begin grouping the input files.
A progress bar indicates the status of the grouping and averaging
operation. When the operation is complete the following message
appears:

Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Grouping utility closes.

About the Grouping Utility


The About the Grouping Utility command displays the software
version number as well as copyright and licensing information.
Utilities

36 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23

23.4 Combine Utility


The Combine utility combines (concatenates) two or more data files
into a single data file, making file management and editing easier if
you often deal with large numbers of files. Although GPS Pathfinder
Office lets you open multiple data files, you can only edit the data if
you open a single data file.

B Tip – You do not need to combine files for differential correction or for
exporting. You can select multiple base and multiple rover files for
correction, and multiple files for exporting to a GIS.

Topics in this section include:


• Starting the Combine utility
• Using the Combine utility
• Exiting the Combine utility
• A description of the Combine utility main window

23.4.1 Starting the Combine Utility


Before you can start the Combine utility, Microsoft Windows must be
running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software
must be installed. Start the Combine utility from within GPS
Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Combine utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Combine from the menu bar.
To start the Combine utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Combine.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 369


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility

The main window of the Combine utility appears:

23.4.2 Using the Combine Utility


This section provides you with a step-by-step explanation of how to
use the Combine utility.

C Warning – Differentially correct your data files before using the Combine
utility. You may not be able to differentially correct the combined file.
Utilities

37 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23

To combine a set of data files:


1. Specify the input files. By default, the last-used set of files are
selected as input files. For example, if you had just
differentially corrected a set of data files, the corrected files
would be selected by default.
a. If you want to change the list of selected input files, click
Browse. The Select Data Files dialog appears:

b. Select the input files, and click Open to return to the main
window.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 371


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility

2. Specify the output file. By default, the output file is called


combined.ssf and will be created in the current project folder.
a. If you want to change the file name click Output File. The
following dialog appears:

b. Enter the new file name in the File name field. Select a
different folder if necessary.
c. Click Save to confirm your selection and return to the
main window. The new file name is displayed in the
Output File field.
3. Select a sort method:
– Select Chronologically to sort the data files by time,
putting the earliest first. This is the default and the
recommended option.
– Select Alphabetically to sort the data files alphabetically by
file name. This option may combine the input data files out
of time sequence.
4. Click OK to combine the files.
Utilities

37 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23

A progress bar appears and the operation begins. When the


operation is complete the following message appears:

5. Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Combine utility


closes.

23.4.3 Exiting the Combine Utility


The Combine utility closes automatically when an operation is
completed successfully. If the operation was not successful and you do
not want to repeat the process, exit the Combine utility manually.
To exit the Combine utility:
• Click Cancel. The Combine utility closes.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 373


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility

23.4.4 Combine Utility Main Window


This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the
Combine utility.
When you start the Combine utility the following window appears:

The fields and buttons in the Combine utility main window are
described in the following sections.
Input Files This group contains the controls for selecting files for
processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the
Selected Files list are stored. By default, this points to the current GPS
Pathfinder Office project folder.
The Selected Files window lists the files that have been selected for
processing in the current session. By default, the last used set of files
are selected. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set
of data files the corrected files would appear in this list by default.
Utilities

37 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23

The Browse button lets you change the list of selected input files. The
Select Data Files dialog appears:

The selected data files are highlighted in the File name list box. There
are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting
the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including
that file will be selected or deselected.
Click Open to accept the highlighted files and return to the Combine
Data Files window.
Output File This field displays the file name that will be created from
the combine operation. By default, the name of the output file is
combined.ssf and it is created in the current GPS Pathfinder Office
project folder.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 375


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility

Click Output File to change the file name. The following dialog
appears:

Enter the new file name in the File name field. Select a different folder
if necessary. Click Save to confirm your selection and return to the
Combine Data Files window. The new file name is displayed in the
Output File field.
Sort This field allows you to select the sort method with which to
process the input files. Table 23.6 shows the two options available:
Table 23.6 Sort options

Option Description
Chronologically Sorts the data files by time, putting the earliest first.
This is the default and the recommended option.
Alphabetically Sorts the data files alphabetically by file name. This
option may combine the input data files out of time
sequence.

Click OK to combine the selected input files.


Utilities

37 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23

A status bar appears and the operation begins.:

When the operation is complete the following message appears:

Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Combine utility closes.


Click Cancel to exit the Combine utility. Any changes made will not
be saved.
Click Help to access the online Help system of the Combine utility.

About the Combine Utility command


The About the Combine Utility command displays the software
version number as well as copyright and licensing information.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 377


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor

23.5 SSF Record Editor


The SSF Record Editor allows you to view Standard Storage Format
(.ssf) files in detail and delete individual records. This utility is
recommended only for troubleshooting or advanced users. It is much
easier to edit features and attributes graphically in the GPS Pathfinder
Office Map window.
The ability to alter the coordinates of a GPS position record is
intentionally omitted. You can use the editor to delete or undelete a
position, but you cannot change the coordinates of that position.
Note – Data files created by Trimble Pathfinder mapping products are
in the SSF format. Not all SSF format files carry a .ssf file name
extension. Other extensions include .cor, .phs, and .wpt.

23.5.1 Starting the SSF Record Editor


Before you can start the SSF Record Editor, Microsoft Windows must
be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software
must be installed. Start the SSF Record Editor from within GPS
Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the SSF Record Editor from the GPS Pathfinder Office
software:
• Select Utilities / Other / SSF Record Editor from the menu bar.
To start the SSF Record Editor from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / SSF
Record Editor.
Utilities

37 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23

23.5.2 Using the SSF Record Editor


When you start the SSF Record Editor, the following window appears:

The menu bar provides access to all of the functionality of the SSF
Record Editor. The status bar displays a tip or instruction referring to
the selected command. The uppermost panel of the screen shows the
records in the open data file. The bottom panel displays additional
information about the highlighted line. On the right side of the screen,
a scroll bar and buttons can move you directly to the beginning or end
of the file.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 379


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor

23.5.3 SSF Record Editor User Interface


The following sections provide a field-by-field description of each
part of the main window of the SSF Record Editor.

File Menu
This menu groups together commands for managing files. Each
command is described in the following sections.
Open Use this command to select the file to view. The following
dialog appears:

Specify the file you wish to edit. By default the last-used file is
selected. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a data
file, the corrected file would be selected.
Note – Data files created by the Trimble Pathfinder Mapping products
are SSF format files. Not all SSF format files carry a .ssf file name
extension. other extensions include .cor, .phs, and .wpt.
Utilities

38 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23

Save Use this command to save the current data file. You can save as
many times as you like while editing the current data file. Select File /
Save or click on the Save File tool to save the current data file.
Save As Use this command to save a copy of the current data file to a
new file. Select File / Save As. The following dialog appears:

Select Save files as text to save the current data file as a text file.
Select Save deleted records to save records that have been deleted in
the data file.
Select Save hidden records to save records not currently being viewed
in the data file.
Click OK to continue with the current selection, the following dialog
appears:

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 381


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor

Use this dialog to select the name, drive and folder of the file to which
the current data file will be saved. If you have chosen to save the data
file as a text file in the previous dialog, the file will have a .txt
extension by default.
Print Use this command to send the current data file to the printer.
Select File / Print or click on the Print tool. The Print dialog appears.
This dialog varies depending on your selected printer.
Set Printer Font Use this command to select the printer font for
printing data files. The standard Font dialog is displayed, allowing
you to select the font name, type and size to be used. A sample of the
font is displayed.
Properties Use this command to view the properties of the data file.
Statistics such as file size and the number of records in the file are
automatically generated. Select File / Properties. The following dialog
appears:

Exit Select File / Exit to close the SSF Record Editor.


If the data file currently open has been modified, when you select this
command you are prompted to save the data file before exiting the
SSF Record Editor.
Utilities

38 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23

23.5.4 Edit Menu


The Edit menu groups together commands for editing text and for
searching for records in the data file. Each command is described in
the following sections.
Copy Selected Records to Clipboard Use this command, or press
[Ctrl]+[C] to copy the highlighted records to the clipboard.
Delete Selected Records Use this command, or press [Delete] to
delete the highlighted records. All records in the data file can be
deleted except the header and data dictionary records. If you want to
delete the data dictionary records select Edit / Allow Data Dictionary
Deletions.
Deleted records in the file (except for the header and data dictionary
records) have the ignore flag set and display on the screen with an
overstrike.
Deleted records are not removed from the file, but are ignored. They
can be undeleted with the Undelete Record, or Undelete All Records
commands. To permanently remove the deleted records from the file,
select File / Save As and specify that deleted records are to be
removed.
Undelete Selected Records Use this command, or press [Ctrl]+[U] to
undelete the highlighted records.
If records are deleted and then Save As is used, those records are not
recoverable because they are no longer in the file. This command only
works on records that are visible with an overstrike.
Delete All Records Use this command to delete all records in the
current data file. All records in the data file can be deleted except the
header and data dictionary records. If you want to delete the data
dictionary records select Edit / Allow Data Dictionary Deletions.
Deleted records in the file (except for the header and data dictionary
records) have the ignore flag set and display on the screen with an
overstrike.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 383


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor

Deleted records are not removed from the file, but are ignored. They
can be undeleted with the Undelete Record, or Undelete All Records
commands. To permanently remove the deleted records from the file,
select File / Save As and specify that deleted records are to be
removed.
Undelete All Records Use this command to undelete all deleted
records in the data file.
If records are deleted and then Save As is used, those records are not
recoverable because they are no longer in the file. This command only
works on records that are visible with an overstrike.
Delete Positions Outside Features Use this command to delete all Not
in feature positions from the data file.
Deleted records are not removed from the file, but are ignored. They
can be undeleted with the Undelete Record, or Undelete All Records
commands. To permanently remove the deleted records from the file,
select File / Save As and specify that deleted records are to be
removed.

C Warning – Do not use this option if the file contains quickmarks, or data
recorded in quickmark mode will be lost.

Change Record Use this command to edit the selected Survey Station
record. The following dialog appears:

In the Antenna Height field enter the amended antenna height in


meters.
Utilities

38 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23

In the Antenna Type field select the appropriate antenna type.


In the Height Code field select the appropriate height reference.
Click Default to set all fields to the default values.
Click OK to accept the amended settings and close the dialog.
This command is only available when a survey station record is
selected.
Allow Data Dictionary Deletions Use this command to allow data
dictionary records to be deleted from the data file. By default data
dictionary records cannot be deleted from the data file.
Find By Record Type Use this command to search for occurrences of
a particular type of record in the file. Select Edit / Find by Record
Type, or click on the Find by Record Type tool. The following dialog
appears:

In the Find field select the record type that you want to search for.
In the Direction field specify the direction in which the file should be
searched. Select Up to search the file from the currently highlighted
record to the beginning of the file. Select Down to search the file from
the currently highlighted record to the end of the file.
Click Find Next or press [F3] to find the next occurrence of the record
type specified in the Find by Record Type dialog.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 385


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor

23.5.5 View Menu


The View menu contains commands that affect the display of
information. You can view and hide different record types and
configure the display of the SSF Record Editor main window. each
command is described in the following sections.
Records by Type Use this command to filter the data shown in the
main window, so that only records of a particular type are displayed.
Select View / Records by Type. The following dialog appears:

To hide a record type click on the check box with the mouse, or
highlight the record type and press the spacebar, or highlight the
record type and click Hide Selected.
Click Hide All to hide all record types in the data file.
Click OK to return to the main window with the parameters selected.
Only the record types chosen will be displayed in the main window.
Note – The View Record by Type filter is combined with all other
active filters to determine what is displayed in the main window. This
means that if two or more filters are enabled, only records that meet
the requirements of all filters will be displayed.
Utilities

38 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23

Position Records by Status Use this command to filter the position


records shown in the main window, so that only records with a
particular GPS status are displayed. Select View / Position Records by
Status. The following dialog appears:

Use the Minimum Satellites field to only display positions that were
collected with a specified minimum number of satellites.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 387


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor

Table 23.7 shows the three options:


Table 23.7 Minimum Satellites field options

Option Description
2D (3 or more SVs) Positions collected using 3 or more satellites will be
displayed.
3D (4 or more SVs) Positions collected using 4 or more satellites will be
displayed. Positions collected in Manual 2D mode,
or in Auto 2D/3D mode while only 3 satellites were
available, will not be displayed.
3D (5 or more SVs) Positions collected using 5 or more satellites will be
displayed. Positions collected in Manual 2D, Auto
2D/3D or in Manual 3D mode when only 4 satellites
were available, will not be displayed.

The Minimum Satellites field does not filter out positions that were
created manually (without GPS). For example, all of the positions in a
file created by the Import utility will pass through this filter
successfully.
The Maximum PDOP field is used to filter out positions that are above
a particular PDOP mask. Only positions with a PDOP less than or
equal to this value will be displayed. This field only has an effect if
DOP values are present in the data file.
Select Any to display all positions, regardless of PDOP value.
Note – It is good field practice to set and use the PDOP mask setting
correctly in the data collector you are using. However, if mistakes are
made, the Maximum PDOP field gives you another chance to filter out
positions with a high PDOP. For more information on correct PDOP
masks, see the operation manual for your data collector.
Maximum PDOP does not filter out positions that were created
manually (without using GPS). For example, all of the positions in a
file created by the Import utility will pass through this filter
successfully.
Utilities

38 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23

Use the Include the Positions That Are group to filter positions based
on their correction status. Any combination of options may be
checked, as shown in Table 23.8.
Table 23.8 Include the Positions That Are group options

Option Type of Position Displayed


Uncorrected Uncorrected positions will be displayed.
Non GPS Positions collected manually, or positions that were
originally imported from a GIS or CAD system using the
Import utility, will be displayed.
P(Y) Code Positions collected using P- or Y-code will be displayed.
Only military receivers can compute or log positions
using these codes.
Real-time WAAS The position has been differentially corrected using
Real-time WAAS.
Real-time Positions collected using real-time DGPS will be
Differential displayed.
Differentially Positions corrected with the Differential Correction utility
Corrected will be displayed.
RTK Float The position has been collected as an RTK float
position.
Phase Processed Positions corrected using the Carrier Phase Processed
(Float) option in the Differential Correction utility, achieving a
float solution will be exported.
RTK Fixed Phase differential positions collected with survey-grade
receivers (such as a Series 4000 receiver) will be
displayed.
Phase Processed Positions corrected using the Carrier Phase Processed
(Fixed) option in the Differential Correction utility, achieving a
fixed solution will be exported.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 389


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor

Records by Time Use this command to view only records that fall
within a specified time period. Select View / Records by Time. The
following dialog appears:

In the Start Time field enter the desired start time. The default is the
first record in the file.
In the End Time field enter the desired end time. The default is the last
record in the file.
Select Include this Period from the View group to display only records
that fall within the specified start and end times.
Select Exclude this Period from the View group to display only records
that do not fall within the specified start and end times.
Click Show All to reset the Start Time and End Time fields to the first
and last records in the file.
Click OK to apply the filter to the displayed data file.
Split Use this command to adjust the layout of the SSF Record Editor
main window. The splitter bar separates the main part of the window
into two panels. The upper panel displays each record in the open data
file in chronological order, while the bottom panel provides additional
information about the highlighted record.
Utilities

39 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23

Select View / Split. The cursor jumps to the point where the two panels
meet and changes to a . Use the up-arrow and down-arrow keys to
adjust the size of the panels. To accept the position of the splitter bar,
press Enter. Alternatively use the mouse to drag the splitter bar to the
appropriate position.
Status Bar By default, the SSF Record Editor displays a status bar
showing information about the SSF Record Editor. Select View /
Status Bar to hide the status bar. The check mark beside the Status Bar
command disappears, indicating that the status bar is hidden. To
display the status bar again, select the command again.
Toolbar By default, the SSF Record Editor displays a toolbar with a
number of tools for common operations. Select View / Toolbar to hide
the toolbar. The check mark beside the Toolbar command disappears,
indicating that the toolbar is hidden. To display the toolbar again,
select the command again.

Select ... to ...


open an existing document

save the active document

print a document

copy the selection and place it on the clipboard

find the specified record type

Help Menu This menu provides access to the standard About window.
Select Help / About SSF Record Editor to display the About SSF
Record Editor window.
This window provides important information about the SSF Record
Editor version number and copyright.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 391


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files

23.6 Check SSF Files


The Check SSF Files utility checks a data or almanac file in SSF or
COR format for invalid or corrupt position records. The utility looks at
all records in the file and checks that values are valid and in the correct
sequence, that the necessary information and variables are present,
and that files are complete. A position record is considered invalid if
one of the following conditions is met:
–π /2 > latitude > π /2
–π < longitude < π
–100000 meters > altitude > 100000 meters

23.6.1 Starting the Check SSF Files Utility


Before you can start the Check SSF Files utility, Microsoft Windows
must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office
software must be installed. Start the Check SSF Files utility from
within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Check SSF Files utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office
software:
• Select Utilities / Other / Check SSF Files from the menu bar.
To start the Check SSF Files utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Check
SSF from the pop-up menu.
Utilities

39 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23

The main window of the Check SSF Files utility appears:

23.6.2 Using the Check SSF Files Utility


This section provides you with a step-by-step explanation of how to
use the Check SSF Files utility.
To check an SSF file for invalid or corrupt position records:
1. Specify the input files
By default, the last-used set of files are selected as input files.
For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set of data
files, the corrected files would be selected by default.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 393


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files

2. If you want to change the list of selected input files, click


Browse. The Select Data Files dialog appears:

Select the input files, and click Open to return to the main
window.
3. Select the repair options:
– Select the features you wish the Check SSF Files utility to
use in processing the file(s):
– Select Fix corrupt records to ensure that any corrupt
records that are found in the file are fixed.
– Select Remove records out of time sequence to remove
positions records that are out of time sequence in the data
file.
– Select Alter GPS Week Number to change the GPS week
number. You must then specify whether the GPS week
number should be updated automatically by the Check SSF
Files utility, or manually, to specify the week number.
Utilities

39 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23

– Select Add Precision records to create a precision record


for each GPS position in the data file. The Data Transfer
utility calculates precision records when the data file is
transferred, so you need to use this option only if your files
do not contain precision records.
4. Click OK to process the files.
When the operation is complete the following message appears:

5. Click More Details to see a detailed log file of the Check SSF
Files operation. If errors were found in the data file and you are
unsure why, check the log files.
6. Click Close to acknowledge the message and close this
window.

23.6.3 Exiting the Check SSF Files Utility


The Check SSF Files utility does not close automatically when an
operation is completed. The Check SSF Files utility must always be
exited manually.
To exit the Check SSF Files utility:
• Click Cancel. The Check SSF utility closes.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 395


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files

23.6.4 Check SSF Files Utility Main Window


This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the
Check SSF Files utility.
When you start the Check SSF Files utility the following window
appears:

Input Files The Input Files group contains the controls for selecting
files for processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the
Selected Files list are stored. By default, this points to the current GPS
Pathfinder Office project folder.
The Selected Files window lists the files that have been selected for
processing in the current session. By default, the last-used set of data
files are selected. For example, if you had just differentially corrected
a set of data files the corrected files would appear in this list by
default, but you can change the selected input files if required.
Utilities

39 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23

Repair Options This group allows you to select the action taken by
the Check SSF Files utility if errors are found in the data files.

Select... to...
Fix corrupt records have the Check SSF Files utility automatically fix
any corrupt records it finds in the data file. When
you use this option a new file is created without the
bad position records. The new file has the same
name as the original file except it substitutes an
underscore (_) for the first letter of the file name.
For example, if the file name is 01234567.SSF, the
new file name is _1234567.SSF.
Remove records out of have the Check SSF Files utility remove any
time sequence records in the data files that occur out of sequence.
Alter GPS Week have the Check SSF Files utility change the GPS
Number week number in the data file. This may be required
after August 22, 1999, when the GPS Week
Number Rollover occurs.
Automatically have the Check SSF Files utility automatically alter
the GPS week number.
Manually have the Check SSF Files utility change to the
value specified in the Change To field.
Add Precision records have the Check SSF Files utility calculate a
precision record for each GPS position in the data
file.

Note – The Data Transfer utility adds precision records when a data
file is transferred to the computer, and the Differential Correction
utility calculates precision records when a data file is corrected. You
need to use this option only if the data file does not already contain
precision records.
Click OK to check the selected input files.
A progress dialog displays during the time of processing.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 397


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files

When the operation is complete the following message appears:

Click More Details to see a detailed log file of the Check SSF Files
operation. If errors were found in the data file and you are unsure why,
check the log file.
Click Close to acknowledge the message and close this window.
Click Cancel to exit the Check SSF Files utility. Any changes made
will not be saved.
Utilities

39 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23

23.6.5 Change the Selected Input Files


1. Click Browse to change the list of selected input files. The
following dialog appears:

2. The selected data files are highlighted in the File name field.
There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
– Replace the list by clicking on a single file in the window,
or holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on a number of files.
– Add or remove individual files from the list by holding
down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
– Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and
selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up
to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
3. Click Open to accept the highlighted files and return to the
Check SSF Files window.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 399


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files

23.6.6 Check SSF Files Log File


The Check SSF Files utility creates a log file with the following
information.
SSF File Header Information The source of the file, including the
receiver and data collector used, the reference position and the start
and end time of the file.
Record Counts The different types of records in the data file.
Other Statistics The maximum and minimum height, latitude and
longitude and a breakdown of the number of features of each type
(point, line, area and quickmark) in the data file.
Summary Information A summary of the action taken in this Check
SSF Files session.
An example log file
CHECKING FILE tutdata3.cor
*************************
*** SSF FILE HEADER INFORMATION ***
Version: 325
Source: -28416 (hex: FFFF9100)
Comment: MCORR400 v4.56 W32
Receiver Type: Pro XL
Data Recorder Type: Asset Survey PDT3300
Station Type: Rover
Reference:
Longitude: 121°59'56.063"W
Latitude: 37°24'45.075"N
Height: 15.443 meters
GPS Week Number: 849
Start Time: 20-Apr-1996 04:05:25
End Time: 20-Apr-1996 05:16:41
*** RECORD COUNTS ***
Total Records: 1171
Utilities

40 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23

Deleted Records: 0
Position Records: 535
Precision Sigma: 535
Post Proc Corrected: 535
Real Time Corrected: 0
Survey Station Records: 4
Offset Records: 64
*** OTHER STATISTICS ***
Minimum Height: -30.512 meters
Maximum Height: -26.273 meters
Minimum Latitude: 37°24'38.222"N
Maximum Latitude: 37°24'53.025"N
Minimum Longitude: 122°00'01.544"W
Maximum Longitude: 121°59'37.525"W
Data Dictionary Entries: 79, Version: 4
Features: 64, Version: 4
Point: 56
Offset: 1
Line: 1
Area: 7
Quick Mark: 0
*** NOTE ***
File tutdata3.cor read successfully
****** SUMMARY INFORMATION ******
1 Input file was read
1171 Records Checked
No Errors Found to Fix
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 401


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility

23.7 SSF to RINEX Utility


The SSF to RINEX utility converts Trimble Standard Storage Format
(.ssf) files into the Receiver INdependent EXchange (RINEX) format.
You can use this utility to convert base station files produced by
Trimble GPS receivers into the RINEX format, for use by non-
Trimble applications.

23.7.1 Starting the SSF to RINEX Utility


Before you can start the SSF to RINEX utility, Microsoft Windows
must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office
software must be installed. Start the SSF to RINEX utility from within
GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the SSF to RINEX utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office
software:
• Select Utilities / Other / SSF to RINEX from the menu bar.
To start the SSF to RINEX utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / SSF to
RINEX.
Utilities

40 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility 23

23.7.2 SSF to RINEX Utility Main Window


This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the
SSF to RINEX utility.
When you start the SSF to RINEX utility the following window
appears:

The fields and buttons in the SSF to RINEX utility Main Window are
described in the following sections.
Input SSF Files This field contains the controls for selecting files for
processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the
Selected Files field are stored. By default, this points to the base files
folder of the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 403


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility

The Selected Files field lists the files that have been selected for
processing in the current session. To change the list of selected input
files, click Browse. The following dialog appears:

There are several ways to select files:


• Click on a single file or drag the mouse down a series of files.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting
the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including
that file will be selected or deselected.
Click Open to accept the selected files and return to the main window
of the SSF to RINEX utility.
Output Folder This field displays the folder where the created files
will be stored. By default, this is set to the base file folder of the
current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
Utilities

40 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility 23

Note – Two output files are created by the SSF to RINEX utility for
each input file, both with the same name as the input file, but with the
extensions .obs and .nav.
To change the output folder click Browse. The following dialog
appears:

To open a folder, click its plus sign or double click the folder. (Double-
clicking an open folder closes the folder.) Select the output folder by
clicking it. Click OK to confirm your selection. The path is displayed
in the Output Folder field.
Click OK to begin the SSF to RINEX conversion operation.
A progress bar appears followed by the SSF To RINEX Configuration
dialog.
Click Cancel to close the SSF to RINEX utility. Any changes made
will not be saved.
Click Help to access the online help system of the SSF to RINEX
utility.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 405


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility

23.7.3 SSF to RINEX Configuration Dialog


When you click OK to start the conversion from SSF to RINEX
format, the following dialog appears:

Generally, these fields are for your reference only; you must enter
something but what you enter does not affect the processing.
Antenna Marker This group contains the fields that enable you to
identify the antenna marker. Enter a name and reference number for
your antenna marker.
Names This group contains the fields that identify the observer. Enter
the observer and agency names if appropriate.
Receivers This group contains the fields that identify the receiver.
Enter the type, number, and version of your GPS antenna.
Antenna Position This group contains the fields for identifying the
position of the GPS antenna.
The first field is supplied with the antenna height from the .ssf file. If
the file does not contain an antenna height record, the previously used
value is supplied. Heights are in the current altitude units. (Select
Options / Coordinate System to access the unit settings.)
Utilities

40 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility 23

Note – You can only process a group of SSF files at one time if they use
the same antenna height.
In the next two fields, enter the eccentricity of the antenna to the east
of the marker, and to the north of the marker. Eccentricity values are in
the current offset units. (Select Options / Units, in the GPS Pathfinder
Office main program, to access the Units dialog.) The marker position
is the same as the reference position in the header of the input SSF file.
Time Tolerance This field is used for processing old base files that do
not contain carrier phase records. The Tolerance field is used to
indicate the time at which a new epoch started. If time tolerance is not
enabled, the SSF to RINEX utility uses .prn records to indicate a new
epoch.
Select the Enable check box to enable grouping of measurement data
based on a time tolerance. Enter the tolerance in seconds in the
Tolerance field. By default, time tolerance grouping is disabled.
Note – All settings in the SSF To RINEX Configuration dialog are
remembered the next time you run the SSF to RINEX utility.
Click OK to continue with the conversion. A progress bar appears,
tracking the operation. The SSF to RINEX utility closes when the
process is complete.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 407


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility

23.8 Text Conversion Utility


The Text Conversion utility converts text strings in data files from the
ASCII character set used by Microsoft DOS to the Microsoft
Windows ANSI (ISO 8859) character set, and vice versa.
You need this utility if you use extended or national characters in
features, attributes, attribute values, and notes. Examples of these
characters are:
• Latin characters with diacritics, for example á, ç, ü, ñ
• Letter shapes outside the standard upper and lowercase
Latin characters A-Z, for example ø, ß, Þ
• Less commonly used symbols, for example §, ±, ²
Characters in the ANSI character set are displayed correctly in the
GPS Pathfinder Office software. If characters do not appear correctly
in this program, use the Text Conversion utility to convert from one
character set to another.

23.8.1 Starting the Text Conversion Utility


Before you can start the Text Conversion utility, Microsoft Windows
must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office
software must be installed. Start the Text Conversion utility from
within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Text Conversion utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office
software:
• Select Utilities / Other / Text Conversion from the menu bar.
To start the Text Conversion utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Text
Conversion.
Utilities

40 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility 23

23.8.2 Text Conversion Utility Main Window


This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the
Text Conversion utility.
When you start the Text Conversion utility, the following window
appears:

The fields and buttons in the Text Conversion utility main window are
described in the following sections.
Input SSF Files This group contains the controls for selecting files for
processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the
Selected Files field are stored. By default, this points to the current
GPS Pathfinder Office project folder. Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 409


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility

The Selected Files window contains the files that have been selected
for processing in the current session. To change the list of selected
input files, click Browse. The following dialog appears:

There are several ways to select files:


• Click on a single file.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down
[Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting
the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including
that file will be selected or deselected.
Click Open to accept the selected files and return to the main window
of the Text Conversion utility.
Output Folder This field displays the folder where the converted files
will be stored. By default, this is set to the data folder of the current
GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
Utilities

41 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility 23

To change the output folder, click Browse. The following dialog


appears:

To open a folder click its plus sign or double click the folder. (Double-
clicking an open folder closes the folder.) Select the output folder by
clicking it. Click OK to confirm your selection. The path is displayed
in the Output Folder field.
Convert From Use this option to select the conversion direction.
DOS to Windows Use this option to convert text in the input file from
the DOS ASCII character set to the Windows ANSI character set. Use
this option if feature or attribute names, attribute values, or notes are
not displayed correctly in GPS Pathfinder Office.
Windows to DOS Use this option to convert text in the input file from
the Windows ANSI character set to the DOS ASCII character set. Use
this option if feature or attribute names, attribute values, or notes
display correctly in GPS Pathfinder Office but are to be used in a
DOS-based program.
Click OK to begin the text conversion operation.
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 411


23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility

If text files may be overwritten, a warning dialog appears.

Click Yes to proceed, or No to cancel.


A progress bar appears, tracking the operation.
When the process is complete a dialog appears.

Click OK to dismiss the dialog and close the Text Conversion utility.
Click Cancel to close the Text Conversion utility.
Click Help to access the online help system of the Text Conversion
utility.

About the SSF to RINEX Utility command


The About the SSF to RINEX utility command displays the software
version number as well as copyright and licensing information.
Utilities

41 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


CHAPTER

24
24 Standalone Utilities
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Using the standalone utilities
■ ADJUST2D
■ ASTOSSF
■ DATREF
■ FOUR2SSF
■ LOAD
■ MULTIDAT
■ PFSTAT
■ RAWTOSSF
■ RPDD
■ SSFREF
■ SSFTOASC
24 Standalone Utilities – Introduction

24.1 Introduction
A number of standalone utility programs are included with GPS
Pathfinder Office. These small programs are run from the DOS
prompt. Some standalone utilities provide functions that are not
available in the GPS Pathfinder Office main menu. Some provide
functions that are available in the GPS Pathfinder Office software, so
the utilities are an alternative method for performing the task.
The first part of this section provides instructions for using the
utilities. The remainder of the section lists the utilities alphabetically
and provides a description of what they do and how they are used.
Utilities

41 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – Using the Standalone Utilities 24

24.2 Using the Standalone Utilities


You need to know the following to use a standalone utility:
• A utility is run by typing the name of the utility at the DOS
prompt. You do not need to start the GPS Pathfinder Office
software to access it. Sometimes you need to type additional
commands after the utility name if you want the utility to
operate in a specific way. This is using a command line
interface.
• The GPS Pathfinder Office installation procedure adds SET and
PATH statements to your autoexec.bat file, so you can run the
standalone utilities from any directory.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 415


24 Standalone Utilities – Using the Standalone Utilities

Table 24.1 and Table 24.2 list the conventions used for describing the
standalone utilities. Refer to these conventions when using a
standalone utility.
Table 24.1 Command Line Syntax

Item Convention
Angle Brackets Placeholders in angle brackets (<INPUT.EXT>) indicate
where to type the name(s) of the required file(s) in the
command line. Replace these with the name(s) of the
actual data file(s). Do not include the angle brackets on
the command line.
Wildcard Some standalone utilities accept a wildcard (* or ?), as
part of the file name. If the program description does
not specifically indicate that you can use a wildcard, the
program does not accept a wildcard.

Table 24.2 Optional Command Conventions

Item Convention
Square Brackets Items in square brackets ([-a]) are optional and do not
have to be included in the command line. Do not
include the square brackets on the command line.
Forward Slash or When you use an option, it must be preceded by a
Hyphen forward slash (/) or a hyphen (-). You can use either. As
a convention, options are listed with a hyphen.

C Warning – You should make copies of your data files and perform work
only on the copies. Do not perform work on the original data files.
Utilities

41 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – ADJUST2D 24

24.3 ADJUST2D
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The ADJUST2D utility adjusts the altitude of 2D position records in a
file. The (horizontal) location of a 2D position record is dependent
upon the altitude that you entered in the field. (If you did not enter an
altitude while collecting data in the field then the software uses the last
altitude computed from a 3D fix.) If 2D data was collected with the
wrong altitude, the positions can be recomputed based upon the new
altitude supplied to the ADJUST2D utility.
Note – The altitude that is provided to the ADJUST2D utility must be
in meters above the WGS-84 ellipsoid.

C Warning – When the altitude of 2D data is adjusted, the horizontal


components of the positions are also adjusted. If an incorrect altitude is
entered the resulting data is also incorrect in the horizontal components.

24.3.1 ADJUST2D Command Line Syntax


To use the ADJUST2D command, enter the following at the DOS
prompt:
ADJUST2D [OPTIONS] [-A <almanac file>] <HAE altitude> -I<filename.ext> -
O<outfile.adj>

ADJUST2D Name of the utility


<HAE altitude> HAE altitude, a numeric entry in meters. It must be
included in the command line.
-I<filename.ext> Name of the input file, -I must be included.
-O<outfile.adj> Name of the output file, -O must be included.

Example:
ADJUST2D -atest.alm 43.67 -r -IA032512B.COR-OA032512B.ADJ
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 417


24 Standalone Utilities – ADJUST2D

Table 24.3 lists the optional ADJUST2D commands.


Table 24.3 Optional ADJUST2D Commands

Command Description
-r Displays a report of how far each position record was shifted.
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the program version number and ID.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions.
Utilities

41 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – ASTOSSF 24

24.4 ASTOSSF
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The ASTOSSF utility converts an unprocessed Asset Surveyor raw
logging file to an output SSF file. The program also adds the .ssf
extension to the output file.

B Tip – This conversion is performed automatically when you transfer data


collector files from a TSC1, TDC1, TDC2, or MC-V running Asset
Surveyor using the Data Transfer utility. You will probably never have to
use this standalone utility.

24.4.1 ASTOSSF Command Line Syntax


To use the ASTOSSF command, enter the following at the DOS
prompt:
ASTOSSF.EXE file

astossf.exe The utility name.


file The unprocessed Asset Surveyor raw logging file.

Example:
ASTOSSF R111111a

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 419


24 Standalone Utilities – DATREF

24.5 DATREF
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The DATREF utility modifies the reference position of any DAT file.
Use this standalone utility to correct the reference position of a base
file before performing any differential correction. You should set the
reference position from within GPS Pathfinder Office. Then the
position can be entered in latitude/longitude, UTM coordinates, or
U.S. State Plane coordinates.

C Warning – The reference position must be entered in the WGS-84 datum


and the latitude/longitude coordinate system.

B Tip – The Differential Correction utility automatically prompts you to


confirm the reference position of any base files used for differential
correction. It is not necessary to use DATREF for this purpose.

24.5.1 DATREF Command Line Syntax


To use the DATREF command, enter the following at the DOS
prompt:
DATREF <filename.DAT> [OPTIONS]

DATREF The utility name.


<filename.DAT> The DAT format input file.
Utilities

42 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – DATREF 24

Table 24.4 lists the optional DATREF commands.


Table 24.4 Optional DATREF Commands

Command Description
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-help As above.
-ver Displays the version number of this program.
-lat Lets you enter the latitude at the command line. Latitude
is in degrees, minutes, and seconds (for example, 34 24
45.5).
-lon Lets you enter the longitude at the command line.
Longitude is in degrees, minutes, and seconds (for
example, -122 16 35.5).
-alt Lets you enter the altitude at the command line. Altitude is
in meters (for example, 100.3).
-ant Lets you enter the antenna height at the command line.
Antenna height is in meters (0 to 99.9 meters).

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 421


24 Standalone Utilities – FOUR2SSF

24.6 FOUR2SSF
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The FOUR2SSF utility converts Trimble Series 4000 receiver files to
SSF files.
You must type the .dat extension of the input data file name. You can
give the output file any name and extension you want. If you do not
specify a name for the output file, it will have the same name as the
.dat file but with an .ssf extension.
This function is not available in the GPS Pathfinder Office software
main menu.

24.6.1 FOUR2SSF Command Line Syntax


To use the FOUR2SSF command, enter the following at the DOS
prompt:
FOUR2SSF [OPTIONS] <INPUTFILE.DAT> [OUTFILE.SSF]

FOUR2SSF The utility name.


<INPUTFILE.DAT> The input file name, a Trimble Series 4000
receiver file.
[OUTFILE.SSF] The output file name.

Example:
FOUR2SSF -wn634 -ion 4000BASE.DAT
Utilities

42 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – FOUR2SSF 24

Table 24.5 lists the optional FOUR2SSF commands.


Table 24.5 Optional FOUR2SSF Commands

Command Description
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the program version number and ID.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions asked by FOUR2SSF.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions asked by FOUR2SSF.
-1a Outputs the older-style position record (pre- Release 2.0
positions).
-wn<int> You must supply a three-digit week number when invoking
this option. You are telling FOUR2SSF to use the following
three-digit number as the week number during processing.
-ion Causes FOURSSF to use *.ION files as ionospheric data
source.
-3d Causes FOURSSF to perform only 3D position processing.
-oldprn Used with older-style PRN records.
-oldmeas Used with older-style measurement records.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 423


24 Standalone Utilities – LOAD

24.7 LOAD
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The LOAD utility transfers data files from the data logger to the office
computer. When the data files are transferred to the office computer
using the LOAD utility, they are automatically converted to the SSF
format.
To transfer data files from the data logger to the office computer using
the LOAD utility:
1. Connect the supplied download cable to your data collector.
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the selected COM port on
the office computer.
3. On the office computer, switch to the directory where the file
will be located.
4. Enter the LOAD <filename> command at the DOS prompt on
the office computer and press [Enter].
Note – Files on a PATHLOG data collector require a .T
extension, for example LOAD <filename.T>
The file is transferred and converted. Both the original data
logger file and the .ssf file are in the directory.

B Tip – The Data Transfer utility is a more flexible way of transferring data
between a data collector and your office computer. Use this program in
preference to LOAD where possible. For batch purposes, the Batch
Processor supports the automatic download of data from a data collector,
as well as differential correction and export of that data.
Utilities

42 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – LOAD 24

24.7.1 LOAD Command Line Syntax


To use the LOAD command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
LOAD [OPTION] <OUTPUT.EXT>

LOAD The utility name.


<output.ext> The name of the file you want to transfer from the GPS
receiver to the PC.

Example:
LOAD A082215B.T

OR:
LOAD A082215B

The option -ALL will get all files.


Example:
LOAD -ALL

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 425


24 Standalone Utilities – LOAD

Table 24.6 lists the optional LOAD commands.


Table 24.6 Optional LOAD Commands

Command Description
-com1 Causes LOAD to use COM1 (instead of COM2).
-com2 Causes LOAD to use COM2 (instead of COM1).
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the utility version number and ID.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-all Downloads all files.
-ana Saves an ASCII log file called COMM.LOG.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions asked by LOAD.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions asked by LOAD.
Utilities

42 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – MULTIDAT 24

24.8 MULTIDAT
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The MULTIDAT utility combines several Series 4000 receiver DAT
files into one DAT file. This file can then be used with the Differential
Correction utility.
Note – There is no need to use MULTIDAT to combine DAT files for
use in the Differential Correction utility. Multiple base files can be
selected, and are combined internally.

24.8.1 MULTIDAT Command Line Syntax


To use the MULTIDAT command, enter the following at the DOS
prompt:
MULTIDAT [options] <input files> -o<output file>

MULTIDAT The utility name.


<input files> The name of the input file(s).
<output file> The name of the output file.

Example:
MULTIDAT -t *.DAT -oBASE0714.DAT

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 427


24 Standalone Utilities – MULTIDAT

Table 24.7 lists the optional MULTIDAT commands.


Table 24.7 Optional MULTIDAT Commands

Command Description
-time Sorts file names chronologically.
-t Sorts file names chronologically.
-alpha Sorts file names alphabetically.
-a Sorts file names alphabetically. Default sort - None.
-nosort Do not sort the files. Default sort - chronologically.
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the utility ID only.
-o<outfile> Specifies the name of the combined output file to be created.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
Utilities

42 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – PFSTAT 24

24.9 PFSTAT
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The PFSTAT utility displays the following statistics on the input file:
• maximum position in the file
• minimum position in the file
• standard deviation of positions in the file
• mean position of the file
• the number of position records in the file
• the start and end times of the file
• whether the file contains velocity of DOP data
The PFSTAT utility only displays the statistics stored within the file.
To recalculate the statistics, run the utility with the -f option.

24.9.1 PFSTAT Command Line Syntax


To use the PFSTAT command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
PFSTAT [options] <INPUT.EXT>

PFSTAT The utility name.


<INPUT.EXT> The name of the file for which you want to calculate
statistics.

Example:
PFSTAT -f TREEFILE.SSF
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 429


24 Standalone Utilities – PFSTAT

Table 24.8 lists the optional PFSTAT commands.


Table 24.8 Optional PFSTAT Commands

Command Description
-f Forces recalculation of statistics.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any message.
-ver Displays the utility ID only.
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
Utilities

43 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – RAWTOSSF 24

24.10RAWTOSSF
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The RAWTOSSF utility converts raw data files from the data collector
format (PATHLOG, Pathfinder Basic series, or GeoExplorer I and II)
to the GPS Pathfinder Office SSF format. You will probably never
need to use this standalone utility, as the normal methods of
transferring data files to the PC automatically convert the files to the
SSF format.

B Tip – This conversion is performed automatically when you transfer data


collector files using the Data Transfer utility.

24.10.1 RAWTOSSF Command Line Syntax


To use the RAWTOSSF command, enter the following at the DOS
prompt:
RAWTOSSF <INPUTFILE.EXT>

RAWTOSSF The utility name.


<input.ext> The name of the data collector file.
A ‘.T’ extension indicates PATHLOG files.

Example:
RAWTOSSF A053104B.T Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 431


24 Standalone Utilities – RPDD

24.11 RPDD
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The RPDD utility removes the data dictionary from an SSF file and
replaces it with a user-specified data dictionary. Alternatively, a new
data dictionary can be combined with the existing data dictionary
instead of replacing it.
This function is not available in the GPS Pathfinder Office main
menu.

24.11.1 RPDD Command Line Syntax


To use the RPDD command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
RPDD INFILE.SSF NEWDD.DDF [options]

RPDD The utility name


joker.ssf The name of the .ssf file
newdd.ddf The name of the user specified data dictionary

Example:
RPDD JOKER.SSF NEWDD.DDF -a

Table 24.9 lists the optional RPDD commands.


Table 24.9 Optional RPDD Commands

Command Description
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options
-ver Displays version number of this program
-a Appends the new data dictionary file instead of replacing the
existing data dictionary
Utilities

43 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – SSFREF 24

24.12SSFREF
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The SSFREF utility modifies the reference position of any SSF file.
Use this standalone utility to correct the reference position of a base
file before performing any differential correction.

C Warning – The reference position must be entered in the WGS-84 datum


and the latitude/longitude coordinate system.

You should set the reference position from within GPS Pathfinder
Office. Then the position can be entered in latitude/longitude, UTM
coordinates, or U.S. State Plane coordinates.

B Tip – The Differential Correction utility automatically prompts you to


confirm the reference position of any base files used for differential
correction. It is not necessary to use SSFREF for this purpose.

24.12.1 SSFREF Command Line Syntax


To use the SSFREF command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
SSFREF <INPUT.SSF> [options]

SSFREF The utility name.


<input.ssf> The name of the file for which you want to change the
reference position.

Example:
SSFREF BASE0617.SSF
Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 433


24 Standalone Utilities – SSFREF

Table 24.10 lists the optional SSFREF commands.


Table 24.10 Optional SSFREF Commands

Command Description
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options
-help As above
-ver Displays the version number of this program
-show Shows only the present reference of the file
-m Mean sea level for altitude, default Ellipsoid
-lat Lets you enter the latitude at the command line Latitude is
in degrees, minutes, and seconds
(for example, 34 24 45.5)
-lon Lets you enter the longitude at the command line.
Longitude is in degrees, minutes, and seconds (for
example, -122 16 35.5)
-alt Lets you enter the altitude at the command line. Altitude is
in meters (for example, 100.3)
-ant Lets you enter the antenna height at the command line.
Antenna height is 0 to 99.9 meters
Utilities

43 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Standalone Utilities – SSFTOASC 24

24.13SSFTOASC
If this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see
Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The SSFTOASC utility inputs an SSF file and outputs time, position,
and altitude to an ASCII format. The units are WGS-84 in meters. The
output file name is the same as the input, except the extension is
changed to .asc. This function lets you use a DOS batch file to convert
SSF files to ASCII format.
This function is not available in the GPS Pathfinder Office main
menu.

24.13.1 SSFTOASC Command Line Syntax


To use the SSFTOASC command, enter the following at the DOS
prompt:
SSFTOASC [flag] <filename>

SSFTOASC The utility name.


[Flag] The flag name.
<filename> The name of the input and output file.

Utilities

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 435


24 Standalone Utilities – SSFTOASC

Table 24.11 lists the optional SSFTOASC commands.


Table 24.11 Optional SSFTOASC Commands

Command Description
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-v Outputs velocity, East, North, Up, in meters/sec.
-d Outputs decimal degrees, latitude, longitude, and altitude.
-u Outputs UTM, Easting, Northing, and altitude.
-noalt Does not output altitude.
-revll Reverses order of latitude and longitude (or Northing and
Easting).
-nad27 Converts from WGS-84 to NAD-27.
-moss Outputs in PC-MOSS format.
-gpstime Shows time as week number, time of week.
-time3 Shows time to 3 decimal places.
-meas Shows raw measurements: PRN, SNR, Code Phase,
Doppler, and Sample Length.
Utilities

43 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Index
Symbols adjusting
altitude of 2D position records 417
.cor files adjustments
specifying location of 256 confirming 275
.nav files 404 antenna height
.obs files 404 setting from a base file 274
.ssf files automatically
converting to RINEX format 402 transferring files 26
searching for a particular record
type 385
selecting to differentially correct 252
B
settings for converting to RINEX 406
.zip files base files
settings for 285 confirming 245
confirming selected 271
local search for 259
Numerics overview 235
processing options 279
2D position records recommended logging intervals 231
adjusting 417 searching for 254
searching on computer for 244
selecting to process rover files 240
A setting antenna height 274
accuracy of data setting reference position 274
improving using the Centimeter base station
Processing Option 236 distances to roving receiver 228
synchronized measurements 230, 231 settings 265
types of errors that can be base station provider
removed 294 deleting from list 262
ADJUST2D utility 417 displaying currently-selected 262
file name structure 266
information about 263

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 437


Index

Internet security details 270 Check SSF Files Help


selecting 289 welcome 392
setting a new provider 261 Check SSF Files utility
setting details of 262, 290 checking
setting Internet address of 266 how to 393
Batch Processor closing 395
closing 317 overview 392
starting 305 starting 392
steps involved in processing files 307 checking
Batch Processor Interface 317 SSF files 393, 394, 395
Batch Processor Log window 345 Choose an existing batch setup 318
Batch Settings wizard closing
step 1 Check SSF Files utility 395
selecting tasks 309 Combine utility 373
step 2 Connection Manager utility 29
setting up data transfer 312 Differential Correction utility 250
step 3 Grouping utility 360
differential correction 313, 314 SSF Record Editor 382
step 4 the Batch Processor 317
exporting files 315 code processing 228
step 5 code processing options
running another program 316 when differentially correcting
beep volume settings 48 files 257
code processing rover files 281
Combine utility
C and how it affects differential
correction 293
carrier phase processing closing 373
and centimeter processing 236 starting 369
and differentially correcting 235 using 370
distance between base station and combining
roving receiver 228 data files 370, 371, 372
options when differentially correcting command line syntax 416
files 257 communication settings 46
types of errors 295 configuration file
Centimeter Processing Options locking 56
using to improve accuracy of password settings 52
data 236 print preview 54
changing printing 55
input files 399 saving 50
survey station record 384, 385

43 8 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Index

unlocking 56 D
Configuration Manager utility
overview 32 data collection
starting 33 correction errors 295
configuring occupation period 230
the Connection Manager utility 23, data collector
24 distances to base station 228
Connection Manager utility data files
before using 21 checking 396
closing 29 how to 393
configuring 23 combining
operation of 26 how to 370
starting 20, 29 selecting .ssf files to convert to
conversion settings 411 RINEX 403
converting statistics of
.ssf files to RINEX format 402 in SSF Record Editor 382
text strings 408 data logger
coordinate system automatically transferring files
changing on GeoExplorer 3 from 26
handheld 42 data settings for GeoExplorer 3 handheld 36
used in the Differential Correction Data Transfer 326
utility 275 Data Transfer utility
copying adding a new device 108
group of controls 56 adding a new e-mail device 132
records to clipboard 383, 384, 385 almanac file 201
corrected data files ASPEN software 175
location of 256 background file 202
corrected files base station file 203
generating 249 component mode 65
output settings 277 configuration file 204
CORS site 269 connection settings 92
Create a new batch setup 319 coordinate system file 205
Create new export setup 338 coordinate systems 207
creating current almanac 103
features from input files when there is data collectors 145
no data dictionary 364 data dictionary file 208
downloading settings 96
e-mail 186
ephemeris file 209
geoid grid file 210

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 439


Index

GIS data file 211 reasons for file rejection 231


GIS folder 183 synchronized measurements 230
global settings dialog 90 types of errors 295
GPS receivers 191 types of errors that can be removed
help file 213 by 294
language file 214 using the Batch Settings wizard 313
list of the devices 91 Differential Correction Help
loading background files 101 welcome 226
main dialog 85 Differential Correction Options dialog 329
other files 215 Differential Correction Settings dialog 330
problems 220 Differential Correction utility
raw observations 216 closing 250
receiving waypoints 104 overview 226
selecting a coordinate system 101 settings 251
sending waypoints 106 starting 238
standalone mode 63 differential GPS 227
station/session table 217 displaying
TerraSync software 179 currently-selected base station
troubleshooting 220 provider 262
types of devices 68, 142 distances
types of files 200 between base station and roving
using 63 receiver 228
waypoint file 218
Delete a batch setup 325
Delete an export setup 342 E
deleting
base station provider 262 Edit menu
device in Configuration Manager 56
monitoring 29 in SSF Record Editor 383
Differential Correction 328 elevation mask
differential correction setting to avoid low satellites 229
before performing 420, 433 errors
effect of settings in the Combine correction 295, 296, 297
utility on 293 differential correction 293
effect of settings in the Group utility effect of settings on differential
on 293 correction 293
effect of settings in the SSF Record file interval errors 231
Editor utility on 293 types of 294
problems with 293 exiting
processing options 257 Check SSF Files utility 395
Combine utility 373

44 0 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Index

Connection Manager utility 29 G


Differential Correction utility 250
Grouping utility 360 generating
the Batch Processor 317 corrected rover files 249
the SSF Record Editor 382 GeoExplorer 3 handheld
Export 337 beep volume settings 48
Export Setup dialog 339 communication settings 46
exporting files coordinate settings 42
using the Batch Settings wizard 315 format settings 45
external devices NMEA settings 48
communication settings 46 RTCM settings 41
specifying how data is collected 36
unit settings 43
GPS
F
differential 227
features multipath 228
creating from input files when there is types of errors that can be
no data dictionary 364 removed 294
File Menu 348 GPS receivers
File menu occupation period 230
in Configuration Manager 35 GPS settings for GeoExplorer 3 handheld 39
in SSF Record Editor 380 group
files copying 56
.cor files 256 locking 56
.nav 405 pasting 56
.obs 405 unlocking 56
.RINEX 402 grouping method
.ssf 402 minimum time break option 365
.ssf files 252 when processing input files in
.zip 285 Grouping utility 364
Base files 235, 236 Grouping utility
rover files 252, 253 and how it affects differential
saving in SSF Record Editor 381 correction 293
finding closing 360
a record type in a .ssf file 385 settings 361
format settings for the GeoExplorer 3 starting 356
handheld 45 using 358
FTP site xvii when to use 354

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 441


Index

H M
Help Menu 352 Modify the properties of an existing batch
Help menu setup 323
in SSF Record Editor 391 Modify the properties of an existing export
Help, context-sensitive xvi setup 341
monitoring
device 29
I multipath 228

input files
selecting .ssf files to convert to
N
RINEX 403
selecting files to combine 374 NMEA settings 48
selecting files to group 361
selecting to check 399
selecting to convert 409 O
installation 304
Internet occupation period 230
problems 299, 300 online Help xvi
Internet search opening
automatically selecting base files from .ssf file 380
the Web 242 output files
overview 286 after they have been combined 375
performing 291 after they have been converted 410
performing for the first time in after they have been converted to .ssf
Differential Correction 286 format 404
Internet server 266 after they have been grouped 363
Introduction 305 Overview dialog 321

L P
local search 241 password settings 52
local search for base files 259 pasting
locking configuration file 56 group 56
log file Pathfinder Office settings 54
created by Check SSF utility 400 PDOP 229
logging intervals 231 port settings 47
positions
filtering 387

44 2 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Index

precision estimates reference position


overview 232 confirming adjustments 248, 275
print preview Reference Position dialog 272
of configuration file 54 setting 246
print setup 54 setting from a base file 274
printer setup settings 273
font 54 settings for base station 265
font when printing from SSF Record reference position coordinates 275
Editor 382 release notes xvi
printing RINEX files
configuration file 55 converting from .ssf files 402
records from SSF Record Editor 382 settings for converting from .ssf
problems files 406
Data Transfer utility 220 rover files
processing files confirming selected 271
options when in differentially correcting 249
correcting files 257 recommended logging intervals 231
selecting files to group 361 selecting base files 240
selecting input files to combine 374 selecting to differentially correct 239,
processing files using the Batch 252
Processor 307 roving receiver
properties distances to base station 228
of data file in SSF Record Editor 382 RTCM settings 41

Q S
quickmarks 384 satellite signals
reflection of 228
satellites
R elevation of 229
filtering 387
readme.txt file xvi minimum number required 228
real-time data collection settings 41 PDOP mask 229
receivers saving
see GPS receivers 230 configuration files 50
records current configuration file with a
filtering 387 different name/location 51
undeleting selected records 383 current data file in SSF Record
viewing by time 390 Editor 381
viewing by type 386

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 443


Index

current file in SSF Record Editor 381 Grouping utility 356


searching SSF Record Editor 378
for a record type in a .ssf file 385 SSF to RINEX utility 402
for base files 254 Text Conversion utility 408
locally for base files 258 statistics 429, 430
on computer for base files 244 Status Bar 348
Select base files manually 336 status bar
Select input files manually 327 in Configuration Manager 57
setting up in SSF Record Editor 391
the Connection Manager 25
smart code processing options
when differentially correcting T
files 257
SNR 229 text
sorting converting 408
data files to combine 376 Text Conversion Help
SSF Record Editor welcome 408
and how it affects differential Text Conversion utility
correction 293 overview 408
closing 382 settings 409
main window 379 starting 408
main window - splitting 390 time period
starting 378 viewing records by 390
status bar 391 Toolbar 347
toolbar 391 toolbars
SSF to RINEX utility in Configuration Manager 57
overview 402 in the SSF Record Editor 391
settings 403 transferring
starting 402 background files to a GIS device 78
SSF to RINEX utility Help coordinate system to a GIS device 80
welcome 402 files from a GIS device 69
Standalone utilities files to a GIS device 74
using 415, 416 waypoint files from a GIS device 84
starting waypoint files to a GIS device 82
Batch Processor 305, 306 transferring files
Check SSF Files utility 392, 393 automatically 26
Combine utility 369, 370 troubleshooting
Configuration Manager utility 33 Data Transfer utility 220
Connection Manager 20, 21
Differential Correction utility 238

44 4 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Index

U W
unit settings for GeoExplorer 3 handheld 43 watching
unlocking configuration file 56 device 29
update notes xvi windows
User command 343 in SSF Record Editor 379, 390
utilities list of configuration files 58
ADJUST2D 417, 418 World Wide Web site xv
ASTOSSF 419
Configuration Manager 32
DATREF 420, 421 Z
FOUR2SSF 422, 423
Grouping 354 zipped files 285
LOAD 424, 425, 426
MULTIDAT 427, 428
PFSTAT 429, 430
RAWTOSSF 431
RPDD 432
SSF to RINEX 402
SSFREF 433, 434
SSFTOASC 435, 436
Standalone utilities
list of 414

V
View menu
in Configuration Manager 57
viewing
records by time 390
records by type 386

GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 445


Index

44 6 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3


Reader Comment Form
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
March 2001 P/N: 31312-28-ENG Revision: B

We appreciate your comments and suggestions for improving this publication.


Contributors of particularly helpful evaluations will receive a thank-you gift.
I use the following Trimble product_______________________________________________
for __________________________________ _______________________________________
Please circle a response for each of the statements below:
1 = Strongly Agree 2 = Agree 3 = Neutral 4 = Disagree 5 = Strongly Disagree
The manual is well organized. 1 2 3 4 5
I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5
The information in the manual is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5
I can easily understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual contains enough examples. 1 2 3 4 5
The examples are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The layout and format are attractive and useful. 1 2 3 4 5
The illustrations are clear and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual is: too long just right too short
Please answer the following questions:
Which sections do you use the most? _____________________________________________
What do you like best about the manual? __________________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
What do you like least about the manual? ___ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
Optional
Name ______________________________________________________________________
Company ___________________________________________________________________
Address_____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
Telephone ____________________________ Fax __________________________________
Please mail to the local office listed on the back cover or to Trimble Navigation Limited,
Mapping & GIS Systems, 645 North Mary Avenue, Post Office Box 3642, Sunnyvale,
CA 94088-3642. Alternatively, e-mail your comments and suggestions to
ReaderFeedback@trimble.com. All comments and suggestions become the property of
Trimble Navigation Limited.

Potrebbero piacerti anche